WO2007026881A1 - Driving support system, driving support apparatus, driving support method, driving support program and recording medium - Google Patents

Driving support system, driving support apparatus, driving support method, driving support program and recording medium Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2007026881A1
WO2007026881A1 PCT/JP2006/317348 JP2006317348W WO2007026881A1 WO 2007026881 A1 WO2007026881 A1 WO 2007026881A1 JP 2006317348 W JP2006317348 W JP 2006317348W WO 2007026881 A1 WO2007026881 A1 WO 2007026881A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
information
vehicle
communication device
moving
moving body
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2006/317348
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
Hiroaki Shibasaki
Original Assignee
Pioneer Corporation
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Pioneer Corporation filed Critical Pioneer Corporation
Priority to JP2007533361A priority Critical patent/JP4789948B2/en
Publication of WO2007026881A1 publication Critical patent/WO2007026881A1/en

Links

Classifications

    • GPHYSICS
    • G08SIGNALLING
    • G08GTRAFFIC CONTROL SYSTEMS
    • G08G1/00Traffic control systems for road vehicles
    • G08G1/16Anti-collision systems
    • G08G1/164Centralised systems, e.g. external to vehicles

Definitions

  • Driving support system driving support device, driving support method, driving support program, and recording medium
  • the present invention relates to a driving support system, a driving support device, a driving support method, a driving support program, and a recording medium that support driving of a moving object.
  • the use of the present invention is not limited to the above-described driving support system, driving support device, driving support method, driving support program, and recording medium.
  • signal information data indicating a change in signal is transmitted to a reception zone from an external transmitter provided at a traffic signal at a junction (intersection), and the signal is transmitted within the reception zone.
  • An in-vehicle device installed in a car traveling on the vehicle receives the signal information data and outputs a corresponding warning message by voice and text to notify the driver. This makes it possible for the driver to know what action he should take and to prevent accidents in the vicinity of the merge point due to carelessness (for example, see Patent Document 1 below).
  • Patent Document 1 Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2003-077703
  • the driving support system according to the invention of claim 1 is installed in the vicinity of one of the two routes joining the joining point.
  • a driving support system comprising a communication device of 1 and a second communication device installed in the vicinity of the other route, wherein the first communication device is moving on the one route
  • the first receiving means for receiving the first moving body force information on the traveling direction of the first moving body and the information on the traveling direction received by the first receiving means
  • the first moving body Determining means for determining whether or not the vehicle is moving toward the junction, and first transmitting means for transmitting the determination result determined by the determining means to the second communication device.
  • the second communication device includes the first communication device.
  • a second receiving means for receiving the determination result transmitted by the transmitting means, and a determination result received by the second receiving means are transmitted to the second mobile body moving along the other route. Second transmitting means.
  • the driving support device is installed in the vicinity of one of the two routes joining the joining point, the first communication device and the other route.
  • a driving support device capable of communicating with a second communication device installed in the vicinity of the first communication device in the traveling direction of the first moving body moving along the one route. And receiving information related to the moving speed of the first moving body, and receiving information related to the direction of travel received by the receiving means. Is determined to determine whether or not the vehicle is moving toward the merging point, and is determined to be moving toward the merging point by the determining unit.
  • the detection means for detecting a temporal change in the movement speed based on the information on the movement speed continuously received by the first reception means, and the determination result determined by the determination means And a transmission means for transmitting the detection result detected by the detection means to the second communication device.
  • the driving support method according to the invention of claim 12 is provided in the vicinity of one of the two routes joining the joining point, and the first communication device and the other route are installed.
  • a first receiving step for receiving information related to the first moving body, and based on the information about the traveling direction received by the first receiving step, the first moving body A determination step for determining whether or not the vehicle is moving, a first transmission step for transmitting the determination result determined by the determination step to the second communication device, and the second communication device To receive the determination result transmitted in the first transmission step.
  • the driving support method according to the invention of claim 15 is provided in the vicinity of one of the two routes joining the joining point, and the first communication device and the other route are installed.
  • a determination step for determining whether or not the vehicle is moving toward the confluence point, and if the determination step determines that the vehicle is moving toward the confluence point, the first reception step continuously
  • the second communication device includes a detection step for detecting a temporal change in the moving speed based on information obtained, a determination result determined by the determination step, and a detection result detected by the detection step.
  • a driving support program according to the invention of claim 16 causes a computer to execute the driving support method according to any
  • a recording medium according to the invention of claim 17 is readable by a computer that records the driving support program according to claim 16.
  • FIG. 1 is a block diagram of a functional configuration of a driving support system according to a first embodiment.
  • FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a procedure of a driving support process of the first communication device.
  • FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing a procedure of a driving support process of the second communication device.
  • FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing traffic conditions to which the driving support system according to the first embodiment is applied.
  • FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing a hardware configuration of the roadside machine.
  • FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing a procedure of driving support processing performed by the main line side roadside machine.
  • FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing a procedure of driving support processing performed by the main roadside unit.
  • FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing a procedure of driving support processing performed by the merging side roadside machine.
  • FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing traffic conditions to which the driving support system according to the second embodiment is applied.
  • FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the driving support process performed by the main roadside unit farthest from the junction.
  • FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing the procedure of driving support processing performed by another main roadside unit.
  • FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing a procedure of a driving support process performed by a merging roadside device farthest from the merging point.
  • FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing a procedure of driving support processing performed by another merging side roadside machine.
  • FIG. 14 is a block diagram of a functional configuration of the driving support system according to the second embodiment.
  • FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the procedure of driving support processing of the driving support system.
  • FIG. 16 is an explanatory diagram showing traffic conditions to which the driving support system according to Example 1 is applied.
  • FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing a procedure of driving support processing performed by the main line side roadside machine.
  • FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing a procedure of driving support processing performed by the merging side roadside machine.
  • FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing a procedure of driving support processing of the driving support system according to the second embodiment. Explanation of symbols
  • FIG. 1 is a block diagram showing the functional configuration of the driving support system according to the first embodiment.
  • the driving support system 100 is a first communication device 1
  • the first communication device 110 is installed in the vicinity of one of the two routes joining the joining point.
  • the second communication device 120 is installed in the vicinity of the other route out of the two routes joining the joining point.
  • the first communication device 110 includes a reception unit 111, a determination unit 112, a detection unit 113, and a transmission unit 114.
  • the receiving unit 111 receives information related to the traveling direction of the first moving body moving along one route where the first communication device 110 is installed in the vicinity, and also relates to the moving speed of the first moving body. Receive information continuously.
  • the reception unit 111 receives the transmitted determination result.
  • the reception unit 111 transmits an acquisition request signal for information on the moving direction and moving speed to a communication device mounted on a mobile body that passes in the vicinity of the own device, and receives the returned information.
  • the moving direction and the moving speed may be obtained by emitting a velocity measurement radio wave to the moving body and receiving the reflected wave.
  • the information related to the traveling direction of the moving body is, for example, moving direction information or destination point information of the moving body transmitted from a communication device mounted on the first moving body.
  • the information on the moving speed is, for example, current speed information transmitted from a communication device mounted on the first moving body, the reflected wave of the speed measuring radio wave described above, and the like.
  • continuously receiving may be information that is always connected to the first mobile unit, or may continue to receive information at regular intervals. Specifically, for example, an information acquisition request signal is transmitted to the first mobile unit at regular intervals, and the returned information is received.
  • the determining unit 112 determines whether or not the first moving body is moving toward the joining point. Specifically, the determination unit 112, for example, if the traveling direction of the first moving body does not change and the vehicle travels along the road, the first moving body joins depending on whether or not the force reaches the joining point. Move towards the point and determine if it is! [0024] When it is determined by the determination unit 112 that the detection unit 113 is moving toward the joining point, the detection unit 113 is based on the information regarding the movement speed continuously received by the reception unit 111. Change is detected.
  • the detection unit 113 stores information on the moving speed received by the reception unit 111, and compares the information received this time with the information received last time. Then, it is detected that there is a change when the information received this time is different from the information received last time, and no change is detected when the information received this time is the same as the information received last time.
  • the detection unit 113 may detect a change for each moving speed of the time to reach the joining point based on the current position of the first moving body and the distance between the joining points. In this case, for example, the detection unit 113 acquires current position information indicating the current position from the first moving body, and calculates the current position force and the distance to the merge point. Then, by dividing the calculated distance by the moving speed, the time for the first moving body to reach the confluence point (hereinafter referred to as the confluence time) is calculated.
  • the detection unit 113 approximates the position of the apparatus main body to the position of the first moving body, and
  • the merging time of the first moving body may be calculated based on the information on the moving speed and the distance between the apparatus main body and the merging point. That is, the merging time may be calculated by dividing the distance between the apparatus main body and the merging point by the speed of the first moving body.
  • the detecting unit 113 may calculate the merging time by using all the information on the moving speed continuously received by the receiving unit 111, or the information received continuously is thinned out at a fixed interval. You may calculate time.
  • the time to reach the meeting point may be one that specifies a point on the time axis such as time, or may be a time having a certain range such as a time zone.
  • Transmitter 114 transmits the determination result determined by determination unit 112 and the detection result detected by detection unit 113 to second communication device 120. If the determination unit 112 determines that the first moving body is not moving to the joining point, the transmission of the information by the transmission unit 114 may be omitted.
  • the transmission unit 114 is a transmission unit 123 of the second communication device 120, which will be described later.
  • the received determination result is transmitted to the first mobile unit.
  • the second communication device 120 includes a reception unit 121, a determination unit 122, and a transmission unit 123.
  • the reception unit 121 receives the determination result and the detection result transmitted by the transmission unit 114 of the first communication device 110.
  • the receiving unit 121 may receive information on the moving speed of the second moving body before and after transmitting the determination result and the detection result by the transmitting unit 114.
  • the determining unit 122 collides the first and second moving bodies based on the moving speed before and after the transmission of the information. Determine the possibility. For example, when the moving speed received by the receiving unit 121 changes before and after the transmission of information, the determining unit 122 calculates the difference between the merging times of the first and second moving bodies. If the difference in merging time is within a predetermined time, it is determined that there is a possibility of collision.
  • the transmission unit 123 transmits the determination result and the detection result received by the reception unit 121 to the second moving body that is moving on the other route out of the two routes that join the joining point. In addition, the transmission unit 123 transmits the determination result determined by the determination unit 122 to the first communication device 110.
  • FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the driving support process of the first communication device.
  • the first communication device 110 continuously receives information on the moving speed of the first moving body by the receiving unit 111 (step S201).
  • the receiving unit 111 receives information related to the traveling direction of the first moving body (step S202).
  • the determination unit 112 determines whether or not the first moving body is moving toward the joining point (step S203).
  • the detection unit 113 detects a change in the moving speed (step S204).
  • step S203 determines whether the determination result obtained in step S203 and the detection result obtained in step S204.
  • the result is transmitted to the second communication device 120 (step S205).
  • step S203: No when it is not moving to the merging point by force (step S203: No), the process returns to step S201, and the subsequent processing is repeated.
  • step S205 When the determination result and the detection result are transmitted to the second communication device 120 in step S205, the first communication device 110 is determined by the determination unit 122 of the second communication device 120 by the reception unit 111. It is determined whether or not the result has been received (step S206). When the determination result is received (step S206: Yes), the transmission unit 114 transmits the received determination result to the first mobile body (step S207), and the processing according to this flowchart is terminated. On the other hand, if the determination result is not received (step S206: No), the process returns to step S201 and the subsequent processing is continued.
  • FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the driving support process of the second communication device.
  • the second communication device 120 waits until the reception unit 121 receives the determination result and the detection result transmitted from the first communication device 110 (step S301: No loop). ).
  • step S301 When the determination result and the detection result are received (step S301: Yes), the received determination result and the detection result are transmitted to the second mobile unit (step S302), and the reception unit 121 determines the determination result and the detection result. Information on the moving speed of the second moving body before and after the transmission of the result is received (step S303). Then, the determination unit 122 determines whether or not there is a possibility of collision between the first moving body and the second moving body (step S304).
  • step S304 If there is a possibility of collision (step S304: Yes), information indicating that there is a possibility of collision between the first mobile unit and the second mobile unit is transmitted to the first communication device 110 ( Step S305), the process according to this flowchart is terminated. At this time, simultaneously with the first communication device 120, information indicating the possibility of a collision may be transmitted to the second mobile unit. On the other hand, if there is no possibility of collision (step S304: No), information indicating that there is no possibility of collision is transmitted to the first communication device 110 (step S306), and the processing according to this flowchart ends. . If there is no possibility of a collision, the transmission of information may be omitted.
  • the driving support system 100 two Among the routes, information on the presence or absence of the first moving body moving from one route to the meeting point is transmitted to the second moving body moving on the other route. can do. As a result, the second moving body can know whether or not there is a possibility of colliding with the first moving body at the junction.
  • the detection result regarding the change in the moving speed of the first moving body is transmitted to the second moving body.
  • the detection result regarding the change in the moving speed of the first moving body is transmitted to the second moving body.
  • the driver of the first moving body can be provided with information that can be used as a judgment material when taking measures to avoid a collision at the junction.
  • information on the moving speed of the first moving body is continuously received, and the detected change in moving speed is transmitted to the second moving body.
  • the second moving body can perform an operation for avoiding a collision in accordance with the change of the first moving body on the route to the merging point.
  • the apparatus main body by approximating the position of the apparatus main body to the position of the first moving body, it is possible to calculate the time to reach the merging point without receiving information on the position from the first moving body. Yes, the first mobile strength can reduce the information received.
  • whether or not there is a possibility of collision between the first moving body and the second moving body is the force determined by the second communication device 120 in the first communication It may be judged by the device 110.
  • the determination unit 122 is provided in the first communication device 110, and the information regarding the moving speed of the second moving body received in step S303 in FIG. 3 is transmitted to the first communication device 110.
  • the determination unit 122 of the first communication device 110 determines whether or not there is a possibility of collision, and transmits the determination result to the first mobile unit and the second communication device 120.
  • a communication server capable of communicating with the first communication device 110 and the second communication device 120 may be provided.
  • the first communication device 110 receives information related to the traveling direction of the first moving body and continuously transmits information related to the moving speed of the first moving body. And the reception result is transmitted to the communication server.
  • the communication server performs the determination and detection in step S 203 and step S 204 in FIG. 2, and transmits the determination result and the detection result to the second communication device 120.
  • the communication server further receives information on the moving speed of the second mobile body before and after transmission of the determination result and the detection result from the second communication device 120, and the first mobile body and the second mobile body It may be determined whether or not there is a possibility of collision with the moving body.
  • Example 1 of the driving support system 100 according to the first embodiment will be described.
  • the driving support system 100 is applied to the driving support system 400 including the roadside devices 430 and 440 installed on the side of the road and the communication devices 411 and 421 mounted on the vehicles 410 and 420. explain.
  • FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a traffic situation to which the driving support system according to the first embodiment is applied.
  • a confluence point P where the main road L1 and the confluence lane L2 of the expressway intersect is shown as an example of the confluence.
  • drive the vehicle 410 (410a to 410c), 420 (420a, 420b) as a line of moving objects!
  • the vehicle 410 is a vehicle traveling on the main line L1
  • the vehicle 420 is a vehicle traveling on the merge lane L2.
  • Communication devices 411 (411a to 411c) and 421 (421a and 421b) are mounted on vehicles 410 and 420, respectively.
  • the communication devices 411 and 421 communicate with roadside devices 430 and 440 installed on the sides of the roads on which the vehicles 410 and 420 travel, respectively, and transmit their own vehicle travel information and receive driving support information.
  • each vehicle 410, 420 has an ID for identifying its own vehicle uniquely assigned to each vehicle 410, 420, such as an IP address. This ID is given to the driver assistance system 400 and used as a communication address, and information is sent to the specific vehicle 410, 420 using the ID of the communication device 411, 421 ⁇ or the vehicle 410, 420. Can be sent.
  • the ID of each vehicle 410, 420 is stored in each communication device 411, 421.
  • the roadside device 430 is installed in the vicinity of the main line L1, travels on the main line L1, and communicates with the communication device 411 of the vehicle 410 passing the roadside device 430 side.
  • the roadside device 440 is installed in the vicinity of the merging lane L2, travels on the merging lane L2, and communicates with the communication device 421 of the vehicle 420 passing through the roadside 440 side.
  • the roadside machine 430 is referred to as a main line side roadside machine 430
  • the roadside machine 440 is referred to as a merge side roadside machine 440.
  • the communication ranges of the main line side roadside machine 430 and the merge side roadside machine 440 are areas A and B (hereinafter referred to as communication areas A and B) indicated by dotted lines in FIG.
  • Communication areas A and B each include a junction P, and can communicate with vehicles 410 and 420 that travel at different speeds in the area and reach the junction P at the same time.
  • the main line side roadside machine 430 and the merge side roadside machine 440 can communicate with each other.
  • the main roadside unit 430 receives information such as the vehicle ID, the traveling direction, and the traveling speed from the vehicle 410 traveling on the main line L1, and the time at which each vehicle 410 reaches the merge point P (hereinafter referred to as the merge time). ) Is calculated and saved. Further, the merging side roadside machine 440 receives information such as a vehicle ID, a traveling direction, and a traveling speed from the vehicle 420 traveling on the merging lane L2, and calculates a merging time of the vehicle 420. Then, a verification request is made to the main road side roadside machine 430 for a vehicle 410 force S with a possibility of collision.
  • the main roadside unit 430 collates the merging time of the vehicle 420 with the stored merging time of the vehicle 410, and if there is a vehicle 410 within the predetermined merging time, there is a possibility of collision.
  • the warning information is transmitted to the confluence side roadside machine 440.
  • the junction side roadside machine 440 Upon receiving the warning information from the main line side roadside machine 430, the junction side roadside machine 440 sends the information to the communication device 421 of the vehicle 420 traveling on the merged lane L2. Send warning information.
  • the communicator 421 displays the contents of warning information or outputs a sound to inform the driver of the vehicle 420 of the possibility of a collision with the vehicle 410 to avoid collision such as deceleration or lane change. Encourage them to take action.
  • main roadside roadside machine 430 continuously communicates with vehicle 410 that may collide with vehicle 420 (hereinafter referred to as the vehicle to be monitored) until it reaches junction P, and its speed and position. To monitor changes in merging time. Then, whenever there is a change in the merging time, it is transmitted to the merging side roadside device 440 each time.
  • the merge side roadside machine 440 monitors the possibility of collision between the monitored vehicle and the vehicle 420 based on the information from the main line side roadside machine 430, and sends warning information to the vehicle 420 if the collision possibility disappears. continue.
  • the monitored vehicle may be a plurality of vehicles 410.
  • the driving support system 400 supports the driving of the vehicles 410 and 420 by the processing as described above.
  • the junction point is the junction point P of the main road L1 and the junction lane L2, but the junction point is an intersection where no traffic signal is provided or a signal. It may be an intersection where a unit is installed. If there is a traffic light at the intersection, the movement of other vehicles entering the intersecting lane force cannot be known, and there is a high possibility that an accident will occur. Even at intersections where traffic lights are provided, it is necessary to determine the possibility of collision with other vehicles, such as at night flashing traffic lights or when there are other vehicles traveling with neglected signals. This is because.
  • a force for explaining an example of a junction where two roads meet may be a four-fork road where two roads intersect, a three-way road, a five-way road, or the like. This is because it is necessary to judge the possibility of collision with other vehicles even at these junctions.
  • a vehicle vehicle 420 in the following embodiment
  • a vehicle that is about to reach a junction receives road information provided in the vicinity of each intersecting road and is provided with warning information.
  • the merging side roadside device 440 requests verification of the main line side roadside device 430, but the mainline side roadside device 430 requests verification of the merging side roadside device 440. It may be done. In this case, the processing of the main line side roadside machine 430 and the merge side roadside machine 440 described below may be read in reverse.
  • FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing the hardware configuration of the roadside machine.
  • roadside machines 430 and 440 include a CPU 501, a ROM 502, a RAM 503, a magnetic disk drive 504, a magnetic disk 505, an optical disk drive 506, an optical disk 507, an audio IZF (interface) 508, A microphone 509, a speaker 510, an input device 511, a video IZF 512, a display 513, and a communication IZF (interface) 514 are provided. Also, the components 501 to 514 are connected by a bus 520 !.
  • the CPU 501 governs overall control of the roadside machines 430 and 440.
  • the ROM 502 records programs such as a boot program, a communication program, a database creation program, and a data analysis program.
  • the RAM 503 is used as a work area for the CPU 501.
  • the magnetic disk drive 504 controls reading and writing of data with respect to the magnetic disk 505 according to the control of the CPU 501.
  • the magnetic disk 505 records data written under the control of the magnetic disk drive 504.
  • the magnetic disk 505 for example, HD (node disk) or FD (flexible disk) can be used.
  • the optical disk drive 506 controls reading and writing of data with respect to the optical disk 507 according to the control of the CPU 501.
  • the optical disc 507 is a detachable recording medium from which data is read according to the control of the optical disc drive 506.
  • the optical disk 507 can use a writable recording medium.
  • the removable recording medium may be a power MO of the optical disc 507, a memory card, or the like.
  • the audio IZF 508 is connected to a microphone 509 for audio input and a speaker 510 for audio output. Audio received by the microphone 509 is AZD converted in the audio IZF508. Audio is output from the speaker 510.
  • Examples of the input device 511 include a remote controller having a plurality of keys for inputting characters, numerical values, various instructions, a keyboard, a mouse, a touch panel, and the like.
  • video IZF 512 is connected to display 513.
  • the video IZF512 includes, for example, a graphic controller that controls the entire display 513 and a buffer memory such as a VRAM (Video RAM) that temporarily records image information that can be displayed immediately.
  • a control IC for controlling the display 513 based on image data output from the graphic controller.
  • Display 513 displays an icon, a cursor, a menu, a window, or various data such as characters and images.
  • this display 513 for example, a CRT, a TFT liquid crystal display, a plasma display, or the like can be adopted.
  • the communication IZF 514 is connected to a communication network via radio, and functions as an interface between the communication devices 411 and 421 and the CPU 501.
  • the communication I / F 514 is further connected to a communication network such as the Internet via wireless and functions as an interface between the communication network and the CPU 501.
  • Communication networks include LANs, WANs, public line networks, mobile phone networks, and the like.
  • the communication IZF514 is composed of, for example, FM tuner, VICS (Vehicle Information and Communication System) Z beacon Resino, wireless communication equipment, and other communication equipment. Get road traffic information. VICS is a registered trademark.
  • the hardware configuration of the communication devices 411 and 421 is at least the CPU 501, ROM 502, RAM 503, audio IZF 50 8, speaker 510, video among the hardware configurations of the roadside devices 430 and 440 described above.
  • I / F512, display 513, and communication I / F514 shall be omitted.
  • the reception units 111 and 121 and the transmission units 114 and 123 are determined by the communication IZF 514 by the determination unit 112, the detection unit 113, and the determination unit 122.
  • Each function is realized by the CPU 501 executing a program recorded in the ROM 502 or the like.
  • FIGS. 6 and 7 are flowcharts showing the procedure of the driving support process performed by the main line side roadside machine.
  • the main roadside machine 430 is in the communication area A of its own device. It is determined whether or not both 410 have entered (step S601). When the vehicle 410 has entered (step S601: Yes), the ID, traveling direction, traveling speed, and position information of the vehicle 410 are received from the communication device 411 of the entering vehicle 410 (step S602).
  • the vehicle 410 is requested to transmit such information, and the returned information is received.
  • the location information is requested to be transmitted when the vehicle 410 has a function of acquiring the current location of the vehicle, such as when a GPS radio wave receiver is installed.
  • step S601: No the process proceeds to step S605 in FIG.
  • the main line side roadside machine 430 calculates a merging time at which the vehicle 410 reaches the merging point P based on the traveling direction and the traveling speed acquired in Step S602 (Step S603). Specifically, when the vehicle 410 travels as it is and reaches the junction P, the time to reach the junction P is calculated on the assumption that the current traveling speed is maintained.
  • the distance between the vehicle 410 and the merging point P is calculated using the position information of the vehicle 410 received in step S602.
  • the distance between the vehicle 410 and the merge point P may be used by approximating the distance between the main roadside machine 430 and the merge point P.
  • the merging time can be calculated even if the vehicle 410 does not have a function of acquiring the current position information of the own vehicle.
  • the merging time may be calculated as a time zone having a predetermined width instead of the time, taking into account the speed change that may occur before reaching the merging point P.
  • the main line side roadside machine 430 stores the received ID, traveling direction, traveling speed, position information, and the calculated joining time as a database (step S604), and proceeds to step S605 in FIG.
  • the data stored in the database is stored at the main roadside unit 430 at least until the merging time elapses, and is subsequently deleted sequentially.
  • the main roadside unit 430 determines whether or not there is a database collation request from the merging side roadside unit 440 (step S605).
  • the database collation request means that the merge side roadside device 440 collates whether there is a vehicle 410 that reaches the merge point P at the same time as the merge time of the vehicle 420 traveling on the merge lane L2. Is.
  • the collation request transmitted from the merge side roadside machine 440 includes the merge time of the vehicle 420. It is rare.
  • step S605 If there is a verification request (step S605: Yes), the database stored in step S604 is verified (step S606) to determine whether there is a vehicle 410 that may collide with the vehicle 420. (Step S607). If there is a vehicle 410 with a possibility of collision (Step S607: Yes), the vehicle 410 is listed as a monitored vehicle (Step S608), and the verification result is sent to the merging roadside unit 440 (Step S608). S609).
  • step S605 when there is no collation request (step S605: No), the process returns to step S601 and the subsequent processing is repeated. If there is no vehicle 410 with a possibility of collision (step S607: No), the collation result is transmitted (step S610), and the processing according to this flowchart is terminated.
  • the main roadside unit 430 includes, for example, a vehicle 410 whose merging time is included in a predetermined time zone including the merging time of the vehicle 420 (for example, 15 seconds before and after the merging time). If there is, the merging time, traveling speed, position information, etc. are extracted with the vehicle as the monitoring target vehicle. Then, the main roadside machine 430 transmits the extracted joining time, traveling speed, position information, and the like of the vehicle 410 as a verification result. At this time, some warning information may be sent to the monitored vehicle.
  • step S607 if there is no vehicle 410 whose joining time is included in a predetermined time zone including the joining time of vehicle 420 (step S607: No), information indicating that there is no corresponding vehicle 410 is sent. I believe. Further, when there is no corresponding vehicle 410 as described above, transmission of information indicating that there is no corresponding vehicle 410 may be performed by omitting the transmission of the verification result.
  • the main roadside unit 430 After transmitting the collation result in step S609, the main roadside unit 430 receives the traveling speed of the monitored vehicle, etc. (step S611).
  • the travel speed and the like are information such as the travel direction, travel speed, and position information received in step S602.
  • the merging time of the monitored vehicle is calculated again (step S612).
  • the calculated merging time is compared with the merging time calculated in step S603 to determine whether there is a change in the merging time (step S613). In this way, it is determined whether there is a change in the merging time when there is a change in the traveling speed or traveling direction of the vehicle 410 compared to when the traveling speed is first received. Losing place It is a force that has a match.
  • step S613: Yes If there is a change in the merging time (step S613: Yes), the merging time change is transmitted to the merging side roadside device 440 (step S614), and the process proceeds to step S615. On the other hand, if there is no change in the merging time (step S613: No), it is determined whether or not the force has reached the merging point P (step S615). If the merging point P is reached (step S615: Yes), The processing by this flow chart ends. On the other hand, if the merging point P is not reached (step S615: No), the process returns to step S611, and the subsequent processing is continued to monitor the monitored vehicle.
  • FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing the procedure of driving support processing performed by the merging side roadside machine.
  • the merging side roadside device 440 waits until the vehicle 420 enters the communication area B of its own device (step S801: No loop).
  • step S801: Yes the ID, traveling direction, traveling speed, and position information of the vehicle 420 are received from the communication device 421 force of the entering vehicle 420 (step S802).
  • the vehicle 420 is requested to transmit these pieces of information, and the returned information is received.
  • the location information is requested to be transmitted when the vehicle 420 has a function of acquiring the current location of the vehicle, such as when a GPS radio wave receiver is installed.
  • merging side roadside machine 440 calculates a merging time at which vehicle 420 reaches merging point P based on the traveling direction and traveling speed acquired in step S802 (step S803). Specifically, when the vehicle 420 reaches the merging point P when traveling on the road as it is, the time to reach the merging point P is calculated on the assumption that the current traveling speed is maintained.
  • the distance between the vehicle 420 and the merging point P is calculated using the position information of the vehicle 420 received in step S802. Further, the distance between the vehicle 420 and the merge point P may be approximated with the distance between the merge side roadside machine 440 and the merge point P. In this case, the merging time can be calculated even if the vehicle 420 does not have the function of acquiring the current position information of the host vehicle. Also, the merging time is calculated not as a time but as a time zone with a predetermined width, taking into account the speed change that can occur before reaching the merging point P. Or even ...
  • merging side roadside machine 440 transmits a verification request including the merging time calculated in step S803 to main line side roadside machine 430 (step S804).
  • the verification request is a request for verification by the merging side roadside device 440 whether there is a vehicle 410 that reaches the merging point P at the same time as the merging time of the vehicle 420.
  • junction side roadside machine 440 waits until a reply to the verification request is received from main line side roadside machine 430 (step S805: No loop). If there is a response to the verification request from main line side roadside machine 430 (step S805: Yes), it is determined whether there is a possibility of collision between vehicle 420 and vehicle 410 based on the returned verification result ( Step S806).
  • the determination as to whether or not there is a possibility of collision is made based on the returned collation result. For example, if the received collation result includes the merging time, traveling speed, position information, etc. of the vehicle 410, it is determined that there is a possibility of collision. If the collation result is information indicating that there is no applicable vehicle 410, it is determined that there is no possibility of collision.
  • step S806 If there is a possibility of collision (step S806: Yes), warning information is transmitted to the communication device 421 of the vehicle 420 (step S807). At this time, for transmitting information to the communication device 421 of the vehicle 420, the ID of the vehicle 420 received in step S802 is used as a communication address.
  • the warning information is information that warns the driver of the vehicle 420 of the presence of the vehicle 410 that may collide. Specifically, it is information such as the merging time, traveling speed, position information, and specific measures for avoiding the collision of the vehicle 410 that may collide.
  • the communicator 421 of the vehicle 420 notifies the driver of the vehicle 420 of the presence of the vehicle 410 that is likely to collide by displaying the transmitted warning information on a screen or by outputting sound. Based on the information notified from the communication device 421, the driver of the vehicle 420 takes measures to avoid a collision with the vehicle 410 (for example, reduction of travel speed, lane change, etc.).
  • step S806 No
  • the warning information is not transmitted, and the processing according to this flowchart is terminated.
  • the vehicle 410 with the possibility of collision may send information to the effect!
  • the merging side roadside device 440 determines whether or not it has received the information regarding the change in the merging time from the main line side roadside device 430 (step S808).
  • the information related to the change in the merging time is information that the main roadside unit 430 transmits when there is a change in the merging time of the monitoring target vehicle in step S614 in FIG.
  • step S809 it is determined whether or not the collision with the monitored vehicle is avoided. For example, if the difference between the newly received merging time of the monitored vehicle and the merging time of the vehicle 420 is equal to or longer than the predetermined time, the possibility of collision is lost and the collision is determined. If it is determined that the collision has been avoided and the time is less than the predetermined time, it is determined that the collision is not avoided and the collision is not avoided.
  • step S809 If a collision with the monitored vehicle is avoided (step S809: Yes), the process according to this flow chart is terminated. At this time, information indicating that the collision has been avoided may be transmitted to the communication device 421 of the vehicle 420.
  • step S808: No if the information regarding the change of the merging time is not received (step S808: No), or if the collision is not avoided (step S809: No), whether the vehicle 420 has reached the merging point P or not. Is determined (step S810). For example, whether or not the vehicle has reached the merge point P is determined by, for example, the force at which the merge time calculated in step S803 has elapsed or the vehicle 420 is continuously requested to transmit position information and returned. The current position information is cut halfway depending on whether the current location information has passed merging point P.
  • step S810: Yes When the vehicle 420 has arrived at the junction P (step S810: Yes), it is not necessary to transmit warning information about the possibility of collision, so the processing according to this flowchart is terminated. On the other hand, when the vehicle 420 has not reached the junction P (step S810: No), the process returns to step S807, and continues to transmit warning information about the possibility of collision to the vehicle 420.
  • the above is the procedure of the driving support process of the driving support system 400.
  • Example 1 only the main roadside machine 430 detects a change in the merging time of the vehicle 410 traveling on the main line L1, but the merging side roadside machine 440 also travels on the merging lane L2. It is also possible to detect a change in the merging time of the vehicle 420 and feed it back to the main roadside unit 430. As a result, the main line side roadside machine 430 can provide more accurate information to the merging side roadside machine 440.
  • the merging side roadside machine 440 can propose measures for avoiding a collision including the following vehicle to the driver of the vehicle 420.
  • the collision avoidance operation (hereinafter referred to as the collision avoidance operation) is not dependent on the driver's operation, and the driving assistance device or the automatic driving device (not shown) provided in the vehicles 410 and 420. This can be done automatically. At that time, information on the possibility of collision is transmitted to other vehicles 410, 420 having a possibility of collision, and at the same time, information on the type of collision avoidance operation such as deceleration or lane change ( Hereinafter, the avoidance operation information may be transmitted.
  • the avoidance movement information is automatically transmitted according to the brake operation and steering wheel operation! ,.
  • the avoidance operation information transmitted to the other vehicles 410 and 420 is displayed with the contents of the communication devices 411 and 421 mounted on the other vehicles 410 and 420.
  • the driver of the other vehicles 410 and 420 recognizes that the other side has entered the avoiding operation, and does not perform the avoiding operation as it is. You can make a semi-U-stop to drive.
  • a rule that the vehicle 410 traveling on the main line L1 performs the collision avoidance operation is promoted to the vehicle 410 from the vehicle 420 traveling on the confluence lane L2.
  • a notification may be sent.
  • the vehicle 410 traveling on the main line L1 may send a notification that prompts the vehicle 420 to perform a collision avoidance operation.
  • the vehicle 410, 420 is provided with a function that can automatically recognize the rear and side traffic conditions, the lane on the side that received the notification is unlikely to cause collision avoidance. Returns a signal that the vehicle cannot avoid, and the vehicles 410 and 420 on the side that sent the notification perform the collision avoidance operation.
  • step S806 in FIG. 8 may be determined by the main roadside unit 430.
  • the main line side roadside machine 430 determines the possibility of collision based on the database of the merge time of the vehicle 420 and the merge time of the vehicle 410 included in the verification request transmitted in step S804. Then, the determination result is transmitted to the second communication device 120 instead of the database collation result. Also, in this case, if there is a change in the merging time in step S613 of FIG. 7, it is determined again whether there is a possibility of collision, and the determination result is transmitted to the merging side roadside device 440. As a matter of fact.
  • the main road side machine 430 and the merging side road machine 440 identify the vehicles 410 and 420 that may collide, Monitoring can be continued up to the meeting point P.
  • the driver of the vehicles 410 and 420 can perform a collision avoidance process such as deceleration or lane change while taking into consideration the movement of the other vehicles 410 and 420 that may possibly collide.
  • driving support for the vehicles 410 and 420 is provided by the roadside machines 430 and 440 installed on the main line L1 and the merging lane L2, respectively.
  • driving support for the vehicles 410 and 420 is performed by the roadside machines 930 and 940 installed on the main line L1 and the merging lane L2, respectively.
  • roadside machines 930 and 940 As described above, by providing a plurality of roadside machines 930 and 940, it is possible to provide driving support that more reflects actual traffic conditions.
  • FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram illustrating traffic conditions to which the driving support system according to the second embodiment is applied.
  • Example 1 shown in FIG.
  • the merge point P where the main road LI and the merge lane L2 intersect is shown.
  • Vehicles 410 (410a to 410c) and 420 (420a, 42 Ob) are traveling around the junction P as an example of a moving body.
  • the vehicle 410 is a vehicle traveling on the main line L1
  • the vehicle 420 is a vehicle traveling on the merging lane L2.
  • Communication devices 411 (411a to 411c) and 421 (421a and 421b) are mounted on vehicles 410 and 420, respectively.
  • the communication devices 411 and 421 communicate with roadside devices 930 and 940 installed on the side of the road on which the vehicles 410 and 420 travel, respectively, and transmit their own vehicle travel information and receive driving support information.
  • each vehicle 410, 420 has an ID for identifying its own vehicle, for example, an IP address uniquely assigned to each vehicle 410, 420. This ID is assigned to the driver assistance system 900 and used as a communication address, and information is sent to the specific vehicle 410, 420 using the ID of the communication device 411, 421 ⁇ or the vehicle 410, 420. Can be sent. The ID of each vehicle 410, 420 is stored in each communication device 411, 421.
  • the roadside machine 930 (930a to 930n) is installed in the vicinity of the main line L1, travels on the main line L1, and communicates with the communication device 411 of the vehicle 410 that passes the roadside machine 930 side.
  • the roadside machine 940 (940a to 940m) is installed in the vicinity of the merging lane L2, travels on the merging lane L2, and communicates with the communicator 421 of the vehicle 420 that passes the roadside machine 940 side.
  • the roadside machine 930 is referred to as the main line side roadside machine 930
  • the roadside machine 940 is referred to as the merge side roadside machine 940.
  • the main roadside unit 930 (930a to 930n) is installed in the vicinity of the main line L1 with an appropriate distance between the front points of the junction P.
  • the farthest V from the junction P is the main roadside unit 930a
  • the one closest to the junction P is the main roadside machine 930 ⁇ .
  • the merging side roadside machine 940 (940a to 940m) is installed in the vicinity of the merging lane L2 with a front force at the merging point P with an appropriate interval.
  • the merging side roadside machine 940 the one that is farthest from the merging point P is the merging side roadside machine 940a, and the one that is closest to the merging point P is the merging side roadside machine 940m.
  • the main line side roadside machine 930 and the merging side roadside machine 940 are roadside machines for narrow area communication such as DSRC (Dedicated Short Range Communication), for example. , 421
  • DSRC Dedicated Short Range Communication
  • 421 The position of the vehicle 410, 420 at the time of communication with 421 It should be narrow enough to approximate the position of.
  • the main line side roadside machine 930 and the merge side roadside machine 940 can transmit and receive information to and from each other by communication through a network.
  • communication between the main line side machine 930 and the merge side road machine 940 with the vehicles 410 and 420 is referred to as “narrow area communication”, and communication between the main line road machine 930 and the merge side road machine 940 is referred to as “wide area communication”. .
  • the main line side roadside machine 930 and the merge side roadside machine 940 preliminarily hold their respective wide area communication addresses.
  • the main line side roadside machine 930 and the merge side roadside machine 940 do not hold the address for narrow-area communication of the vehicles 910 and 920, and when the vehicles 910 and 920 pass in the vicinity of their own devices ( Obtain the communication address by making an ID) acquisition request.
  • the hardware configuration of the roadside machines 930 and 940 is the same as that of the roadside machines 330 and 340 according to the first embodiment, and thus the description thereof is omitted.
  • the processing performed by the main roadside unit 930a farthest from the junction P will be described.
  • the processing of the main line side roadside machine 930a farthest from the junction point P and the other main line side roadside machines 930b to 930n will be described separately, but in each main line side roadside machine 930a to 930n, Either process can be performed.
  • FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the driving support process performed by the main roadside machine farthest from the junction.
  • the main line side roadside machine 930a determines whether or not the vehicle 410 has passed in the vicinity of the own apparatus (step S1001). If the vehicle 410 has passed (step S1001: Yes), the vehicle 410 ID, travel direction, travel speed, and position information are received from the communication device 411 of the passed vehicle 410 (step S1002).
  • step S1001 the vehicle 410 is requested to transmit these pieces of information, and the returned information is received.
  • the location information is requested to be transmitted when the vehicle 410 has a function of acquiring the current location of the vehicle, such as when a GPS radio wave receiver is installed.
  • step S1001 No
  • the process proceeds to step S1005.
  • the main line side roadside machine 930a receives the traveling direction and traveling received in step S1002. Based on the speed, a joining time at which the vehicle 410 reaches the joining point P is calculated (step S1003). Specifically, when the vehicle 410 reaches the confluence P when traveling on the road as it is, the time to reach the confluence P is calculated on the assumption that the current traveling speed is maintained.
  • the merging time can be calculated without the vehicle 410 having the function of acquiring the current position information of the host vehicle. Further, when the position information of the vehicle 410 can be received at step S1002, the received position information may be used. Also, the merging time may be calculated as a time zone having a predetermined width instead of the time, taking into account the speed change that may occur before reaching the merging point P.
  • the main roadside unit 930a stores the received ID, traveling direction, traveling speed, position information, and the calculated joining time as a database (step S1004).
  • the data stored in the database is stored at the main roadside unit 930a until at least the merge time elapses, and thereafter it is deleted sequentially.
  • the main line side roadside machine 930a determines whether or not there is a database collation request from the merging side roadside machine 940 (step S1005).
  • the collation request of the database means that the merging side roadside device 940 collates whether or not there is a force of the vehicle 410 arriving at the merge point P at the same time as the merge time of the vehicle 420 traveling on the merge lane L2. It is what is requested.
  • the verification request transmitted from the merging roadside machine 940 includes the merging time of the vehicle 420.
  • step S 1005 If there is a verification request (step S 1005: Yes), the database stored in step S 1004 is verified (step S 1006), and there is a force with the vehicle 410 that may collide with the vehicle 420. It is determined whether or not (step S1007).
  • step S1007 If there is a vehicle 410 with a possibility of collision (step S1007: Yes), the vehicle 410 is listed as a monitored vehicle (step S1008), and the verification result is transmitted to the merging side roadside device 940 ( Step S1009). Then, information related to the monitoring target vehicle is transmitted to the other main line side roadside devices 930b to 930n (step S1010), and the processing according to this flowchart ends.
  • the information about the monitored vehicle is, for example, the ID of the monitored vehicle. And information such as merging time and traveling speed. At this time, some warning information may be sent to the monitored vehicle.
  • step S1005 if there is no collation request (step S1005: No), the process returns to step S1001, and the subsequent processing is repeated. If there is no vehicle 410 with a possibility of collision (step S10 07: No), the collation result is transmitted to the merging side roadside device 940 (step S1011), and the processing by this flow chart is terminated.
  • step S1007 the main roadside unit 930 determines whether there is a vehicle 410 whose merging time is included in a predetermined time zone (for example, 15 seconds before and after the merging time) including the merging time of the vehicle 420, for example. Collate, and if there is, extract the merge time, travel speed, position information, etc. Then, the main roadside unit 930 transmits the extracted joining time, traveling speed, position information, and the like of the vehicle 410 as a verification result.
  • a predetermined time zone for example, 15 seconds before and after the merging time
  • the main roadside unit 930 transmits the extracted joining time, traveling speed, position information, and the like of the vehicle 410 as a verification result.
  • step S1007 if there is no vehicle 410 that includes the merging time in a predetermined time zone including the merging time of vehicle 420 (step S1007: No), information indicating that the corresponding vehicle 410 is not present is displayed. Send. Further, when there is no corresponding vehicle 410 as described above, transmission of information indicating that there is no corresponding vehicle 410 may be substituted by omitting the transmission of the verification result.
  • FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the procedure of driving support processing performed by another main roadside device. Note that the other main roadside units 930b to 930n receive the information on the monitored vehicle transmitted from the mainline side roadside unit 930a in step S1010 in FIG. 10 in advance.
  • the process waits until the vehicle 410 passes through the other main roadside machines 930b to 930n and the vicinity of the own apparatus (step S1101: No loop).
  • the vehicle 410 passes (step S1101: Yes)
  • the ID is received from the vehicle 410 (step SI102), and it is determined whether or not the vehicle is a monitoring target vehicle (step S1103). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the vehicle is a monitoring target vehicle by comparing the ID included in the information related to the monitoring target vehicle received from the main line side roadside machine 930a with the ID received in step S1102.
  • step S1103 In the case of a monitored vehicle (step S1103: Yes), the traveling direction, traveling speed, position information, etc. of the vehicle 410 are received (step S1104). And the received information power is The merging time is calculated (step SI 105), the merging time information that also includes the ID of the monitored vehicle and the calculated merging time force is transmitted to the merging side roadside device 940 (step S1106), and the processing according to this flowchart is terminated. .
  • step S 1103 the process returns to step S 110 1 and the subsequent processing is repeated. The above is the processing performed by the main line side roadside machine 930.
  • the driving support process performed by the merging side roadside machine 940 will be described.
  • the processing performed by the junction side roadside device 940a farthest from the junction point P will be described.
  • the power to explain the processing of the merging side roadside machine 940a farthest from the merging point P and the other merging side roadside machines 940b to 940m in which of the merging side roadside machines 940a to 940m Processing may be performed.
  • FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the driving support process performed by the merging side roadside machine farthest from the merging point.
  • V that is farthest from the merge point P and the merge-side roadside device 940a waits until the vehicle 420 passes in the vicinity of the own device (step S1201: No loop).
  • step S 1201 No loop
  • the ID, traveling direction, traveling speed, and position information of the vehicle 420 are received from the communication device 421 of the passed vehicle 420 (step S 1202).
  • the vehicle 420 is requested to transmit these pieces of information, and the returned information is received.
  • the location information is requested to be transmitted when the vehicle 420 has a function of acquiring the current location of the vehicle, such as when a GPS radio wave receiver is installed.
  • merging side roadside machine 940a calculates a merging time at which vehicle 420 reaches merging point P based on the traveling direction and the traveling speed acquired in step S1202 (step S1203). Specifically, when the vehicle 420 reaches the confluence P when traveling on the road as it is, the time to reach the confluence P is calculated on the assumption that the current traveling speed is maintained. [0138] In calculating the merging time, the distance between the vehicle 420 and the merging point P is used by approximating the distance between the merging side roadside device 940 and the merging point P. In this case, the merging time can be calculated without the vehicle 420 having the function of acquiring the current position information of the host vehicle.
  • the position information of the vehicle 420 is received at step S802, it may be calculated using the received information.
  • the confluence time is calculated not as a time but as a time zone with a predetermined width.
  • merging side roadside device 940a transmits a verification request including the merging time calculated in step S1203 to main line side roadside device 930 (step S1204).
  • the verification request is for the merging side roadside device 940a to verify whether there is a vehicle 410 that reaches the merging point P at the same time as the merging time of the vehicle 420.
  • all main line side roadside machines 930 may send a verification request, or any main line side roadside machine 930 may send a matching request. .
  • junction side roadside machine 940a waits until a reply to the verification request is received from main line side roadside machine 930 (step S1205: No loop).
  • Step S1205 No loop
  • Step S1205 Yes
  • Step S1206 it is determined whether there is a possibility of collision between the vehicle 420 and the vehicle 410 based on the returned verification result.
  • Whether there is a possibility of collision is determined based on the returned collation result. For example, if the received collation result includes the merging time, traveling speed, position information, etc. of the vehicle 410, it is determined that there is a possibility of collision. If the collation result is information indicating that there is no applicable vehicle 410, it is determined that there is no possibility of collision. As in Example 1, the determination of whether there is a possibility of a collision may be made by the main line side roadside machine 930.
  • step S1206 If there is a possibility of a collision (step S1206: Yes), warning information is transmitted to the other merging side roadside devices 940b to 940m (step S1207), and the processing according to this flowchart ends. On the other hand, when there is no possibility of collision (step S1206: No), the warning information is not transmitted, and the processing according to this flowchart is terminated. At this time, information indicating that there is no possibility of collision! / Is sent to other merging roadside devices 940b to 940m. [0143]
  • the warning information is information that warns the driver of the vehicle 420 of the presence of the vehicle 410 that may collide.
  • the communicator 421 of the vehicle 420 notifies the driver of the vehicle 420 of the presence of the vehicle 410 that is likely to collide by displaying the transmitted warning information on a screen or by outputting sound. Based on the information notified from the communication device 421, the driver of the vehicle 420 takes measures to avoid a collision with the vehicle 410 (for example, reduction of travel speed, lane change, etc.).
  • FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure of driving support processing performed by another merging roadside device.
  • the other merging side roadside devices 940b to 940m wait until receiving the warning information transmitted by the merging side roadside device 940a (step S1301: No loop).
  • the warning information is received (step S1301: Yes)
  • the other merging roadside units 940b to 940m extract the vehicle 420 ID from the received warning information (step S1302) o
  • step S1303 No loop
  • step S 1 303: Yes an ID is received from the passed vehicle 420 (step S 1304).
  • step S 1302 the received ID and the ID extracted in step S1302 are collated, and it is determined whether or not the destination is the warning information (step S1305).
  • step S1305 If it is the destination of the warning information (step S1305: Yes), that is, if the ID received in step S1304 and the ID extracted in step S1302 are equal, the merge time of the vehicle 420 corresponding to that ID It is determined whether information has been received (step S 1306).
  • the merging time information is information transmitted from the other main roadside units 930a to 930n in step S1106 of FIG.
  • step S1306 When the joining time information is received (step S1306: Yes), it is determined by referring to the received joining time whether the collision between the vehicle 420 and the monitored vehicle is avoided (step S13 07). .
  • the judgment as to whether or not the collision has been avoided is, for example, a newly received monitored vehicle If the difference between the merging time of the vehicle and the merging time of the vehicle 420 is equal to or greater than the predetermined time, it is determined that the collision has been avoided and the collision has been avoided. Therefore, it is determined that the collision is not avoided.
  • step S1307: Yes When the collision is avoided (step S1307: Yes), the warning information received in step S1301 is not transmitted, and the processing according to this flowchart is terminated. On the other hand, if the collision is not avoided (step S1307: No), or if the merging time information is not received (step S1306: No), the warning information received in step SI301 is transmitted. (Step SI 308) The processing according to this flowchart is terminated.
  • the communication device 421 of the vehicle 420 to which the warning information is transmitted in step S1308 displays the transmitted warning information on a screen or outputs a sound, so that there is a vehicle 410 (monitoring target vehicle) that may have a collision. Is notified to the driver of the vehicle 420.
  • the driver of the vehicle 420 can take measures to avoid a collision with the vehicle 410 (for example, reduction of travel speed, lane change, etc.) based on the information notified from the communication device 421.
  • the traveling state of the vehicles 410 and 420 is monitored by the roadside machines 930 and 940 installed in the main line L1 and the merging lane L2, respectively.
  • the roadside machines 930 and 940 installed in the main line L1 and the merging lane L2, respectively.
  • each roadside unit receives ID, traveling direction, traveling speed, and position information from the vehicles 410 and 420 (for example, step S601 in FIG. 6, step S802 in FIG. 8, etc.) and transmission of warning information. Only processing (for example, step S807 in FIG. 8) is performed. Therefore, the configuration of each roadside unit 440 can realize driving support with a simple configuration with respect to the roadside unit installed on the road as long as it includes a communication unit and a communication unit with the vehicles 410 and 420.
  • the traveling speed of the vehicle 420 is continuously monitored by the merging side roadside machines 440 and 940, and if there is a speed change, the main roadside roadside machines 430 and 930 are used.
  • the vehicle 410 may be notified.
  • the vehicle 410 traveling on the main line L1 In this way, it is possible to grasp the traveling state of the vehicle 420 traveling on the merging lane L2 and take measures to avoid the collision.
  • the driving support system As described above, according to the driving support system, of the two lanes LI, L2 that merge at the merge point P, the presence or absence of the vehicle 410 that is moving from the main line L1 to the merge point P by force. Information about this can be sent to the vehicle 420 traveling in the merged lane L2. As a result, the vehicle 420 can know whether or not there is a possibility of collision with the vehicle 410 at the junction P.
  • the detection result regarding the change in the moving speed of the vehicle 410 is transmitted to the vehicle 420.
  • the driver of the vehicle 420 with information that can be used as a judgment material when taking measures to avoid a collision at the junction P.
  • a change in the time when the vehicle 410 reaches the joining point (joining time) is detected and transmitted to the vehicle 420, so that more detailed judgment material can be given.
  • the driver of the vehicle 410 can be given information as a judgment material when taking measures to avoid a collision at the junction P. Further, information regarding the moving speed of vehicle 410 is continuously received, and the detected change in moving speed is transmitted to vehicle 420. As a result, the vehicle 420 can perform an operation for avoiding a collision in accordance with the change of the vehicle 410 in the route to the junction P.
  • the time to reach the junction can be calculated without receiving position information from the vehicles 410 and 420.
  • the information received from the vehicles 410 and 420 can be reduced.
  • FIG. 14 is a block diagram showing a functional configuration of the driving support system according to the second embodiment.
  • the driving support system 2100 includes a first communication device 2110 and a second communication device 2120.
  • the first communication device 2110 is installed in the vicinity of one of the two routes joining the joining point.
  • the second communication device 2120 is installed near the other route. Has been.
  • the driving support system 2100 uses the first communication device 2110 and the second communication device 2120 to support driving of a moving body that moves near the junction.
  • the first communication device 2110 includes a reception unit 2111, a determination unit 2112, a transmission unit 2113, and a calculation unit 2114.
  • the receiving unit 2111 receives information on the traveling direction of the first moving body that is moving along one route, the first moving body force.
  • the information related to the traveling direction of the moving object is, for example, moving direction information or destination point information of the moving object transmitted from the communication device mounted on the first moving object.
  • the reception unit 2111 receives information on the moving speed of the first moving body.
  • the information on the moving speed is, for example, current speed information transmitted from a communication device mounted on the first moving body, or a reflected wave of speed measuring radio waves as described later.
  • Receiving section 2111 transmits an acquisition request signal for information on the moving direction and moving speed, for example, to a communication device mounted on a moving body that passes in the vicinity of its own device, and receives the returned information.
  • a moving speed and a moving direction may be obtained by emitting a velocity measurement radio wave to a moving body and receiving the reflected wave.
  • Determination unit 2112 determines whether or not the first moving body is moving toward the joining point based on the information on the traveling direction received by receiving unit 2111. Specifically, for example, when the traveling unit travels along the road while the traveling direction of the first moving body does not change, the determining unit 2112 determines whether the first moving body joins depending on whether or not the merging point is reached. Judge whether or not to move to the point and hit.
  • Transmitting section 2113 transmits the determination result determined by determining section 2112 to second communication device 2120.
  • the transmission unit 2113 transmits the determination result of the determination unit 2112 in response to the determination result transmission request transmitted from the second communication device 2120.
  • the transmission unit 2113 may transmit information on the moving speed received by the reception unit 2111 to the second communication device 2120 together with the determination result. Further, when the time required for the first mobile unit to reach the joining point is calculated by the calculation unit 2114 described later, the calculation result may be transmitted to the second communication device 2120.
  • Calculation section 2114 calculates the time for the first moving body to reach the joining point based on the information on the moving speed received by receiving section 2111. Here, it reaches the confluence
  • the reaching time may be a point on the time axis such as time, or a time with a certain range such as a time zone! /.
  • the calculation unit 2114 obtains current position information indicating the current position from the first moving body, and calculates the current position force and the distance to the merge point. Then, by dividing the calculated distance by the current travel speed, the time for the first moving body to reach the junction is calculated.
  • the calculation unit 2114 approximates the position of the apparatus main body to the position of the first moving body, and Based on the information on the moving speed and the distance between the main unit and the meeting point, the time for the first moving body to reach the meeting point is calculated. That is, the time required to reach the merge point may be calculated by dividing the distance between the apparatus main body and the merge point by the speed of the first moving body.
  • the second communication device 2 120 includes a reception unit 2121 and a transmission unit 2122.
  • the reception unit 2121 receives the determination result transmitted by the transmission unit 2113 of the first communication device 2110.
  • the receiving unit 2121 receives information on the moving speed of the first moving body or the time required for the first moving body to reach the joining point by the transmitting unit 2113 of the first communication device 2110. Receives information about the moving speed of the first moving body and the time for the first moving body to reach the junction.
  • Transmitting section 2122 transmits the determination result received by receiving section 2121 to the second moving body that is moving on the other route.
  • the transmitting unit 2122 receives the second moving body. In response to this, the information about the moving speed of the first moving body and the time for the first moving body to reach the meeting point are transmitted.
  • the transmission unit 2122 acquires the communication address of the second mobile unit and acquires the acquired communication address. V and send the judgment result to the second mobile unit.
  • the driving support system 2100 receives information on the traveling direction and speed of the first moving body at the first communication device 2110 (step S2201).
  • the reception unit 2111 receives these information.
  • the determining unit 2112 determines whether or not the first moving body is moving toward the joining point (step S2202).
  • the calculation unit 2114 calculates the time (arrival time) for the first moving body to reach the meeting point (step) S2203).
  • the transmitting unit 2113 transmits information indicating that the first moving body is moving toward the meeting point and the arrival time, and transmits the second communication device 2120 (step S2204), and then proceeds to step S2206.
  • Step S2202 determines whether the first moving body is moving toward the joining point in Step S2202 (Step S2202: No).
  • the transmitting unit 2113 causes the first moving body to exert a directing force on the joining point.
  • Information indicating that it is not connected is transmitted to second communication apparatus 2120 (step S2205).
  • the first mobile unit may indicate to the joining point! /, Or! /.
  • the second communication device 2120 receives the determination result and the like transmitted by the first communication device 2110 (step S2206). The reception of these pieces of information is performed by the reception unit 2121 of the second communication device 2120. Then, the transmission unit 2122 [Thus, the information received in step S2206 is transmitted to the second mobile unit (step S2207), and the processing in this flowchart ends.
  • the second communication device 2120 is provided with a calculation unit and a determination unit, and the first mobile unit transmitted from the first communication device 2110 includes only the determination result transmitted from the first communication device 2110. Compare the time to reach the merging point with the time to reach the merging point of the second mobile unit, determine the possibility of matching at the merging point, and send the result including the result. Also good.
  • the reception unit 2121 of the second communication device 2120 moves along the other route in the same manner as the reception unit 2111 of the first communication device 2110, and relates to the traveling direction of the second mobile physical force. Receive information and information about travel speed. Then, the time for the second moving body to reach the joining point is calculated by the calculation unit from the current position of the second moving body and the distance to the joining point and the moving speed of the second moving body. Then, the determination unit compares the time to reach the meeting point of the first moving object and the time to reach the meeting point of the second moving object, and determines the possibility that both will match, The determination result is transmitted to the second mobile unit.
  • the same processing as the processing for the first moving body by the first communication device 2110 is performed as the processing for the second moving body of the second communication device 2120, and these processing are performed simultaneously.
  • the determination results of the first communication device 2110 and the second communication device 2120 may be transmitted to the first mobile body and the second mobile body, respectively.
  • the one moves from one route to the merge point and moves to V.
  • all the information can be transmitted to the second mobile body moving along the other route.
  • the second moving body can know whether or not there is a possibility of colliding with the first moving body at the junction.
  • the time to reach the merge point is calculated without receiving information about the first moving body force position. And the information received by the first mobile strength can be reduced.
  • Example 1 of the driving support system 2100 according to the second embodiment will be described.
  • the driving support system 2100 is applied to the driving support system 2300 including the roadside devices 2330 (2330a, 2330b) installed on the side of the road and the communication devices 2311, 2321 mounted on the vehicles 2310, 2320.
  • the case will be described.
  • the system configuration of the driving support system the hard The configuration is the same.
  • FIG. 16 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a traffic situation to which the driving support system according to the first embodiment is applied.
  • a merging point P where the main road L1 and the merging lane L2 of the expressway intersect is shown.
  • the vehicle 2310 (2310a to 2310c), 2320 (2320a, 2320b) as a line of moving objects!
  • the vehicle 2310 is a vehicle traveling on the main line L1
  • the vehicle 2320 is a vehicle traveling on the merge lane L2.
  • the vehicles 2310 and 2320 are equipped with communication devices 2311 (2311a to 2311c) and 2321 (2321a and 2321b), respectively.
  • Communication equipment 2311, 2321 ⁇ , vehicle 2310, 2320 power ⁇ Each communicates with the roadside machine 2330 installed on the side of the road where it travels, and sends its own driving information and receives driving assistance information.
  • the vehicles 2310 and 2320 are each uniquely assigned an ID for identifying their own vehicle, such as an IP address, for example. This ID is assigned to the driver support system 2300 [KOO! Telecom address] [Used!], And the information of a specific vehicle 2310, 2320 is transmitted using the ID of the communication device 2311, 2321 » vehicle 2310, 2320. Can be sent. The IDs of the vehicles 2310 and 2320 are stored in the communication devices 2311 and 2321, respectively.
  • the roadside machine 2330a is installed in the vicinity of the main line L1, travels on the main line L1, and communicates with the communication device 2311 of the vehicle 2310 passing the roadside machine 233Oa side.
  • the roadside machine 2330b is installed in the vicinity of the junction lane L2, travels on the junction lane L2, and communicates with the communication device 2321 of the vehicle 2320 passing through the roadside machine 2330b side.
  • the roadside machine 2330a will be referred to as the main line side roadside machine 2330a
  • the roadside machine 2330b will be referred to as the merge side roadside machine 2330b.
  • the communication ranges of the main line side roadside machine 2330a and the merge side roadside machine 2330b are areas A and B indicated by dotted lines in FIG. 16, respectively. Areas A and B each include a meeting point P, and can communicate with vehicles 2310 and 2320 that travel at different speeds in the area and reach the meeting point P at the same time. Also, main line side roadside machine 2330a and merge side roadside machine 2330b Can communicate with each other.
  • the main roadside unit 2330a and the confluence side roadside unit 2330b are used until they reach the confluence point P when the vehicles 2310 and 2320 travel at the average speed of the main line L1 or the confluence lane L2. It is installed at a distance where the time is equal (hereinafter referred to as equal time distance). For example, if the average speed of main line L1 is 80kmZh and the average speed of merge lane L2 is 50kmZh, main roadside machine 2330a is approximately 2670m from merge point P, and merge roadside machine 2330b is approximately 1670m from merge point P. Provided. As a result, each roadside unit 2330 is provided at an equidistant distance of 120 seconds until the junction point P is reached.
  • the main line side roadside machine 2330a receives information such as vehicle ID, travel direction, and travel speed from the vehicle 2310 traveling on the main line L1, and the time at which each vehicle 2310 arrives at the merge point P (hereinafter referred to as the merge time). Is calculated and saved. Further, the merging side roadside machine 2330b receives information such as the vehicle ID, the traveling direction, and the traveling speed from the vehicle 2320 traveling on the merging lane L2, and calculates the merging time of the vehicle 2320. Then, the main line side roadside machine 2330a is requested to collate whether there is a vehicle 2310 with a possibility of collision.
  • the main roadside unit 2330a compares the merging time of the vehicle 2320 with the stored merging time of the vehicle 2310, and if there is a vehicle 2310 whose merging time is within the predetermined time, there is a possibility of a collision. Warning information is transmitted to the merging side roadside machine 2330b.
  • the merging side roadside device 2330b receives the warning information from the main line side roadside device 2330a, the merging side roadside device 2330b transmits the warning information to the communication device 2321 of the vehicle 2230 traveling on the merging lane L2.
  • the communicator 2321 displays the contents of warning information or outputs a sound to inform the driver of the vehicle 2320 of the possibility of a collision with the vehicle 2310, and to avoid collision such as deceleration or lane change. Encourage them to take measures to
  • the driving support system 2300 supports the driving of the vehicles 2310 and 2320 through the processing as described above.
  • the junction point is the junction point P of the main road L1 and the junction lane L2, but the junction point is an intersection where no traffic lights are installed or It may be an intersection where a unit is installed. If there is a traffic light at the intersection, it is impossible to know the movement of other vehicles entering the intersecting lane force and an accident occurs. It is highly probable that Even at intersections where traffic lights are provided, it is necessary to determine the possibility of collision with other vehicles, such as at night flashing traffic lights or when there are other vehicles traveling with neglected signals. This is because.
  • a force for explaining the joining point of two roads may be a four-fork road where two roads intersect, a three-way road, a five-way road, or the like. This is because it is necessary to judge the possibility of collision with other vehicles even at these junctions.
  • a vehicle vehicle 2320 in the following example
  • trying to reach the junction receives information such as warning information from a roadside machine 2330 installed in the vicinity of each intersecting road.
  • the merging side roadside device 2330b issues a verification request to the main roadside device 2330a, but the mainline side roadside device 2330a issues a verification request to the merging side roadside device 2330b. It is good as well. In this case, the processing of the main roadside machine 2330a and the merge side roadside machine 2330b described below may be read in reverse.
  • the hardware configuration of the roadside machine 2330 is the same as the configuration described in Example 1 of Embodiment 1, and thus the basic description is omitted here (see FIG. 5).
  • Communication in FIG. 5 The IZF 514 is connected to a communication network via radio and functions as an interface between the communication devices 2311 and 2321 and the CPU 501.
  • the hardware configurations of the communication devices 2311 and 2321 are at least the CPU 501, ROM 502, RAM 503, audio I / F 508, speaker 510, video I / F 512, display among the hardware configurations shown in FIG. It is assumed that 513 and communication I / F514 are removed.
  • the reception units 2 111 and 2121 and the transmission units 2113 and 2122 are communicated by the communication IZF 514, and the determination unit 2112 and the calculation unit 2114 are ROM502.
  • Each function is realized by the CPU 501 executing the programs recorded in the above.
  • Figure 17 shows the procedure of the driving support process performed by the main roadside machine. It is a flowchart to show.
  • main line side roadside device 2330a determines whether or not vehicle 2310 has entered communication area A of its own device (step S2501).
  • step S2501 Yes
  • the ID, traveling direction, traveling speed, and position information of the vehicle 2310 are received from the communication device 2311 of the entering vehicle 2310 (step S2502).
  • step S2501 the vehicle 2310 is requested to transmit such information, and the returned information is received.
  • the location information is requested to be transmitted when the vehicle 2310 has a function for acquiring the current location of the vehicle, such as when a GPS radio wave receiver is installed.
  • step S2501 NO
  • the process proceeds to step S2505.
  • the main line side roadside machine 2330a calculates a merging time at which the vehicle 2310 reaches the merging point P based on the traveling direction and the traveling speed received in step S2502 (step S2503). Specifically, when the vehicle 2310 force travels as it is and reaches the merge point P, the current travel speed is assumed to be maintained, and the time to reach the merge point P is calculated.
  • the distance between the vehicle 2310 and the merging point P is calculated using the position information of the vehicle 2310 received in step S2502.
  • the distance between the main roadside unit 2330a and the confluence point P, which the main line side roadside device 2330a stores, may be used by approximating the distance between the vehicle 2310 and the confluence point P.
  • the merging time can be calculated even if the vehicle 2310 does not have a function of acquiring the current position information of the own vehicle.
  • the merging time may be calculated as a time zone having a predetermined width instead of the time, taking into account the speed change that may occur before reaching the merging point P.
  • the main line side roadside device 2330a stores the received ID, traveling direction, traveling speed, position information, and calculated joining time as a database (step S2504). Data stored in the database is stored in the main roadside unit 2330a at least until the merging time elapses, and thereafter it is deleted sequentially. Next, the main line side roadside machine 2330a determines whether or not there is a database collation request from the merging side roadside machine 2330b (step S2505).
  • the database collation request means whether there is a vehicle 2310 that reaches the merge point P at the same time as the merge time of the vehicle 2320 traveling on the merge lane L2.
  • the machine 2330b requests verification.
  • the collation request transmitted from the merge side roadside machine 23 30b includes the merge time of the vehicle 2320.
  • step S2505 If there is a verification request (step S2505: Yes), the database saved in step S 2504 is verified (step S2506), and the verification result is sent to the merging side roadside device 2330b (step S2507). Then, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.
  • the main line side roadside machine 2330a has, for example, a vehicle 2310 whose merging time is included in a predetermined time zone including the merging time of the vehicle 2320 (for example, 15 seconds before and after the merging time). If there is, the time of merging, traveling speed, position information, etc. are extracted. Then, the main line side roadside machine 2330a transmits the extracted joining time, traveling speed, position information, and the like of the vehicle 2310 as a verification result.
  • step S2505 if there is no database collation request in step S2505 (step S2505: No), the process returns to step S2501, and the subsequent processing is repeated.
  • the main roadside unit 2330a provides the merging side roadside unit 2330b with information on the vehicle 2310 traveling on the main line L1.
  • FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing a procedure of driving support processing performed by the merging side roadside machine.
  • the merging side roadside device 2330b waits until the vehicle 2320 enters the communication area B of its own device (step S2601: No loop).
  • the communicator 2321 force of the entering vehicle 2320 also receives the ID, traveling direction, traveling speed, and position information of the vehicle 2320 (step S2602).
  • the vehicle 2320 is requested to transmit such information, and the returned information is received. Also, the location information Request transmission when the vehicle 2320 has a function to acquire the current position of the vehicle, such as when a communication device is installed.
  • merging side roadside device 2330b calculates a merging time at which vehicle 2320 reaches merging point P based on the traveling direction and traveling speed received in step S2602 (step S2603). Specifically, when the vehicle 2320 arrives at the junction P when traveling on the road as it is, the time when the vehicle 2320 arrives at the junction P is calculated assuming that the current traveling speed is maintained.
  • the distance between the vehicle 2320 and the merging point P is calculated using the position information of the vehicle 2320 received in step S2602.
  • the distance between the vehicle 2320 and the merge point P may be stored in the merge side roadside machine 2330b, and the distance between the merge side roadside machine 2330b and the merge point P may be approximated.
  • the merging time can be calculated even if the vehicle 2320 does not have a function of acquiring the current position information of the own vehicle.
  • the merging time may be calculated as a time zone having a predetermined width instead of the time, taking into account the speed change that may occur before reaching the merging point P.
  • merging side roadside device 2330b transmits a collation request including the merging time calculated in step S2603 to main line side roadside device 2330a (step S2604).
  • the verification request is a request for verification by the merging side roadside device 2330b whether there is a vehicle 2310 that reaches the merging point P at the same time as the merging time of the vehicle 2320.
  • junction side roadside machine 2330b waits until a reply to the verification request is received from main line side roadside machine 2330a (step S2605: No loop). If there is a response to the verification request from main line side roadside machine 2330a (step S2605: Yes), it is determined whether there is a possibility of collision between vehicle 2320 and vehicle 2310 based on the returned verification result ( Step S2606).
  • the determination of the possibility of collision is made based on the returned collation result. For example, if the received collation result includes the merging time, travel speed, position information, etc. of the vehicle 2310, it is determined that there is a possibility of collision. If the collation result is information indicating that there is no applicable vehicle 2310, it is determined that there is no possibility of collision.
  • the main roadside unit 2330a does not make any judgment due to the possibility of a collision, and when there is a verification request, it transmits the merging times of all the recorded vehicles 2310. It is good to do.
  • the merging side roadside machine 2330b compares the merging time of the vehicle 2310 transmitted from the main line side roadside machine 2330a with the merging time of the vehicle 2320, and determines the possibility of a collision at the merging point. .
  • step S2606 If there is a possibility of collision (step S2606: Yes), warning information is transmitted to the communication device 2321 of the vehicle 2320 (step S2607), and the processing according to this flowchart is terminated.
  • the ID of the vehicle 2320 received in step S2602 is used as a communication address.
  • the warning information is information that warns the driver of the vehicle 2320 of the presence of the vehicle 2310 that may collide. Specifically, it includes information such as the time of merging, traveling speed, position information, and specific measures to avoid a collision of the vehicle 2310 that may collide.
  • the communicator 2321 notifies the driver of the vehicle 2320 of the presence of the vehicle 2310 having a possibility of collision by displaying the transmitted warning information on a screen or outputting sound.
  • the driver of the vehicle 2320 takes measures to avoid a collision with the vehicle 2310 (for example, reduction of travel speed, lane change, etc.) based on information notified from the communication device 2321.
  • step S2606 No
  • the warning information is not transmitted, and the processing according to this flowchart ends.
  • the vehicle 2310 with the possibility of a collision may send information to that effect!
  • the presence of the vehicle 2310 to be merged from another lane vehicle and the merge time with respect to the driver of the vehicle 2320 Provide information such as travel speed, and provide judgment materials when taking measures to avoid a collision at junction P.
  • information such as travel speed
  • judgment materials when taking measures to avoid a collision at junction P.
  • traffic in the vicinity of the confluence point P can be performed smoothly.
  • the vehicle 2310 and the speed information of the vehicle 2320 are used to indicate specific measures such as a deceleration instruction, the safety of traffic near the junction P can be further improved.
  • the communication device 232 1 (or the vehicle 2310 (or the vehicle 2310)) is installed.
  • the configuration of the communication device 2311) can be simplified.
  • main line side roadside machine 2330a is the same as that of the merge side roadside machine 2330b.
  • main line side roadside machine 2330a may perform the processing of the above-mentioned merge side roadside machine 2330b on the vehicle 2310. If each judgment result is transmitted to each other, the existence of vehicles 2310 and 2320 traveling in other lanes can be known, and traffic at the junction can be made even safer. .
  • Example 2 In the driving support system 2300 according to Example 1 of Embodiment 2, only the main roadside device 233 Oa holds the database, and the merge side roadside device 2330b makes a database verification request.
  • a database of information on the vehicles 2310 and 2320 traveling in the respective lanes LI and L2 is shared between the main roadside unit 2330a and the merging side roadside unit 2330b. If necessary, each person sends warning information by referring to the shared database.
  • FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the driving support process of the driving support system according to the second embodiment.
  • the power described as the processing of the main roadside unit 2330a is the same as that of the main roadside unit 2330a and the merging side roadside unit 2330b.
  • main line side roadside machine 2330a waits until vehicle 2310 enters communication area A of the own apparatus (step S2701: No loop). If the vehicle 2310 has entered (step S2701: Yes), the ID, traveling direction, traveling speed, and position information of the vehicle 2310 are received from the communication device 2311 of the entering vehicle 2310 (step S2702).
  • the vehicle 2310 is requested to transmit these pieces of information, and the returned information is received.
  • the location information is requested to be transmitted when the vehicle 2310 has a function to acquire the current location of the vehicle, such as when a GPS radio receiver is installed.
  • the main roadside unit 2330a calculates the merging time when the vehicle 2310 reaches the merging point P based on the traveling direction and the traveling speed received in step S2702 (step S2703). Specifically, when the vehicle 2310 force travels as it is and reaches the merge point P, the current travel speed is assumed to be maintained, and the time to reach the merge point P is calculated. [0227] In calculating the merging time, the distance between the vehicle 2310 and the merging point P is calculated using the position information of the vehicle 2310 received in step S2702.
  • the distance between the main roadside unit 2330a and the confluence point P, which the main line side roadside device 2330a stores, may be used by approximating the distance between the vehicle 2310 and the confluence point P.
  • the merging time can be calculated even if the vehicle 2310 does not have a function of acquiring the current position information of the own vehicle.
  • the merging time may be calculated as a time zone having a predetermined width instead of the time, taking into account the speed change that may occur before reaching the merging point P.
  • the main line side roadside machine 2330a stores the received ID, traveling direction, traveling speed, position information, and calculated joining time in the shared database (step S2704).
  • the main line side roadside machine 2330a and the merge side roadside machine 2330b store a shared database in their respective storage areas.
  • the main roadside unit 2330a and the merging side roadside unit 2330b are always connected, and the update of the shared database performed by each is reflected in real time in the database stored in both roadside units 2330 .
  • the data stored in the database is stored at the main roadside unit 2330a at least until the merging time elapses, and thereafter it is deleted sequentially.
  • the main line side roadside machine 2330a refers to the shared database to determine whether or not there is a vehicle 2320 that may collide with the vehicle 2310 (step S2705).
  • the shared database updates made by the confluence roadside unit 2330b are also reflected in real time. Therefore, it is possible to know whether there is a vehicle 2320 that may collide with the vehicle 2310 by referring to the shared database.
  • a vehicle 2320 that includes a merging time in a predetermined time zone including the merging time of the vehicle 2310 (for example, 15 seconds before and after the merging time) determines whether there is a collision possibility. Judge that there is a possibility. If there is a vehicle 2320 with a possibility of collision (step S270 5: Yes), warning information including the merging time, traveling speed, position information, etc. of the vehicle 2310 with a possibility of collision is transmitted to the vehicle 2320. (Step S2706). At this time, for the information transmission of the vehicle 2310 to the communication device 2311, the ID of the vehicle 2310 received in step S2702 is used as the communication address.
  • step S2705 No
  • the warning information is not transmitted.
  • the process according to this flowchart is terminated. At this time, the vehicle 2320 with the possibility of collision may send information to that effect!
  • the driving support system 2300 always connects the main roadside unit 2330a and the merging side roadside unit 2330b, and shares the database.
  • the main roadside machine 2330a and the merging side roadside machine 2330b send warning information to the vehicles 2310, 232 0 traveling in the respective lanes LI, L2 by referring to the database stored on the own device side. be able to.
  • one of the two routes (lanes) LI, L2 that joins the junction P Information about the presence or absence of the vehicle 2310 moving from the main line L1 to the merge point P can be sent to the vehicle 2320 traveling on the other route, the merge lane L2. it can. As a result, the vehicle 2320 can know whether or not there is a possibility of collision with the vehicle 2310 at the junction P.
  • information on the moving speed and joining time of the vehicle 2310 is transmitted to the vehicle 2320 together with the determination result.
  • the driver of the vehicle 2320 can be given information as a judgment material when taking measures to avoid a collision at the junction P.
  • the driving support method described in each embodiment can be realized by executing a program prepared in advance on a computer such as a personal computer or a workstation.
  • This program is recorded on a computer-readable recording medium such as a hard disk, a flexible disk, a CD-ROM, an MO, or a DVD, and is executed by being read by the computer.
  • the program may be a transmission medium that can be distributed via a network such as the Internet.

Landscapes

  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Traffic Control Systems (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

A driving support system (100) comprises a first communication apparatus (110), which is disposed in the vicinity of one of two routes meeting at a junction, and a second communication apparatus (120) disposed in the vicinity of the other route. The first communication apparatus (110) has a reception part (111), a determination part (112), a detection part (113) and a transmission part (114). The second communication apparatus (120) has a reception part (121), a determination part (122) and a transmission part (123).

Description

明 細 書  Specification
運転支援システム、運転支援装置、運転支援方法、運転支援プログラム および記録媒体  Driving support system, driving support device, driving support method, driving support program, and recording medium
技術分野  Technical field
[0001] この発明は、移動体の運転を支援する運転支援システム、運転支援装置、運転支 援方法、運転支援プログラムおよび記録媒体に関する。ただし、この発明の利用は、 前述した運転支援システム、運転支援装置、運転支援方法、運転支援プログラムお よび記録媒体に限られな 、。  The present invention relates to a driving support system, a driving support device, a driving support method, a driving support program, and a recording medium that support driving of a moving object. However, the use of the present invention is not limited to the above-described driving support system, driving support device, driving support method, driving support program, and recording medium.
背景技術  Background art
[0002] 従来、合流地点および合流地点付近における事故を未然に防ぐための情報を運 転者に提供する技術が考案されて!ヽる。  [0002] Conventionally, a technology has been devised to provide drivers with information for preventing accidents at and near junctions.
[0003] このような従来技術においては、合流地点(交差点)の信号機に設けられた外部送 信機から、受信ゾーンに向けて信号の変化を示す信号情報データを送信し、受信ゾ 一ン内を走行する自動車に設けられた車載機が、その信号情報データを受信して対 応する警告メッセージを音声および文字により出力して運転者に報知する。これによ り、運転者は、自分がどのような行動を取るべきかが分かり、不注意による合流地点 付近の事故を未然に防ぐことができる (たとえば、下記特許文献 1参照。 ) o  [0003] In such a conventional technology, signal information data indicating a change in signal is transmitted to a reception zone from an external transmitter provided at a traffic signal at a junction (intersection), and the signal is transmitted within the reception zone. An in-vehicle device installed in a car traveling on the vehicle receives the signal information data and outputs a corresponding warning message by voice and text to notify the driver. This makes it possible for the driver to know what action he should take and to prevent accidents in the vicinity of the merge point due to carelessness (for example, see Patent Document 1 below).
[0004] 特許文献 1:特開 2003— 077093号公報  [0004] Patent Document 1: Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2003-077703
発明の開示  Disclosure of the invention
発明が解決しょうとする課題  Problems to be solved by the invention
[0005] し力しながら、上述した従来技術によれば、合流地点を通行する他の車両との関係 にお 、て、どのような運転をすればょ ヽかは知ることができな ヽと 、う問題が一例とし て挙げられる。このような場合、一方の車両の運転者が信号を遵守しても、他方の車 両の運転者が信号を無視すると、現実の交通状態に対応することができず、合流地 点での事故を防止することができな 、と 、う問題が一例として挙げられる。  [0005] However, according to the conventional technology described above, it is impossible to know what kind of driving should be performed in relation to other vehicles passing through the junction. One example is the problem. In such a case, even if the driver of one vehicle observes the signal, if the driver of the other vehicle ignores the signal, it cannot respond to the actual traffic condition, and an accident at the confluence point. An example of this problem is that it cannot be prevented.
[0006] また、見通しが悪 、合流地点やカーブが連続する道路など、信号機がな 、ために 事故が多発する地点が存在する。し力しながら、事故が多発する地点だからといって 必ずしも信号機が設置されるとは限らない。また、設置されるとしても実際に利用でき るようになるまでには時間がかかるため、当該地点において交通事故の発生を抑制 することができな 、と 、う問題が一例として挙げられる。 [0006] In addition, there are points where accidents occur frequently because there are no traffic lights, such as roads with poor prospects, merging points and continuous curves. However, because it is a point where accidents occur frequently, A traffic light is not always installed. In addition, even if it is installed, it takes time until it can actually be used, so the occurrence of traffic accidents at that point cannot be suppressed.
[0007] さらに、高速道路の合流地点では信号機を設置することができず、運転者の運転 技術に頼らざるを得ないという問題が一例として挙げられる。運転者の運転技術は、 運転経験によって大きく異なり、運転に不慣れな運転者が高速道路の合流地点を走 行すると、交通事故が発生する可能性が高いという問題が一例として挙げられる。 課題を解決するための手段  [0007] Further, as an example, there is a problem that a traffic light cannot be installed at a junction of an expressway, and the driver's driving technique must be relied upon. Drivers' driving skills vary greatly depending on their driving experience. For example, a driver who is unfamiliar with driving is likely to have a traffic accident when driving along a highway junction. Means for solving the problem
[0008] 上述した課題を解決し、目的を達成するため、請求項 1の発明にかかる運転支援シ ステムは、合流地点に合流する 2つのルートのうち一方のルートの近傍に設置されて いる第 1の通信装置と、他方のルートの近傍に設置されている第 2の通信装置と、か らなる運転支援システムであって、前記第 1の通信装置は、前記一方のルートを移動 している第 1の移動体の進行方向に関する情報を前記第 1の移動体力 受信する第 1の受信手段と、前記第 1の受信手段によって受信された進行方向に関する情報に 基づいて、前記第 1の移動体が前記合流地点に向力つて移動しているか否かを判断 する判断手段と、前記判断手段によって判断された判断結果を、前記第 2の通信装 置に送信する第 1の送信手段と、を備え、前記第 2の通信装置は、前記第 1の送信手 段によって送信された判断結果を受信する第 2の受信手段と、前記第 2の受信手段 によって受信された判断結果を、前記他方のルートを移動して 、る第 2の移動体に 送信する第 2の送信手段と、を備えることを特徴とする。  [0008] In order to solve the above-mentioned problems and achieve the object, the driving support system according to the invention of claim 1 is installed in the vicinity of one of the two routes joining the joining point. A driving support system comprising a communication device of 1 and a second communication device installed in the vicinity of the other route, wherein the first communication device is moving on the one route Based on the first receiving means for receiving the first moving body force information on the traveling direction of the first moving body and the information on the traveling direction received by the first receiving means, the first moving body Determining means for determining whether or not the vehicle is moving toward the junction, and first transmitting means for transmitting the determination result determined by the determining means to the second communication device. And the second communication device includes the first communication device. A second receiving means for receiving the determination result transmitted by the transmitting means, and a determination result received by the second receiving means are transmitted to the second mobile body moving along the other route. Second transmitting means.
[0009] また、請求項 11の発明にかかる運転支援装置は、合流地点に合流する 2つのルー トのうち一方のルートの近傍に設置されて 、る第 1の通信装置と、他方のルートの近 傍に設置されている第 2の通信装置と、通信可能な運転支援装置であって、前記第 1の通信装置から、前記一方のルートを移動している第 1の移動体の進行方向に関 する情報を受信するとともに、前記第 1の移動体の移動速度に関する情報を連続的 に受信する受信手段と、前記受信手段によって受信された進行方向に関する情報に 基づいて、前記第 1の移動体が前記合流地点に向力つて移動しているか否かを判断 する判断手段と、前記判断手段によって前記合流地点に向かって移動していると判 断された場合、前記第 1の受信手段によって連続的に受信された移動速度に関する 情報に基づいて、前記移動速度の時間的変化を検出する検出手段と、前記判断手 段によって判断された判断結果と前記検出手段によって検出された検出結果とを、 前記第 2の通信装置に送信する送信手段と、を備えることを特徴とする。 [0009] Further, the driving support device according to the invention of claim 11 is installed in the vicinity of one of the two routes joining the joining point, the first communication device and the other route. A driving support device capable of communicating with a second communication device installed in the vicinity of the first communication device in the traveling direction of the first moving body moving along the one route. And receiving information related to the moving speed of the first moving body, and receiving information related to the direction of travel received by the receiving means. Is determined to determine whether or not the vehicle is moving toward the merging point, and is determined to be moving toward the merging point by the determining unit. When the determination is made, the detection means for detecting a temporal change in the movement speed based on the information on the movement speed continuously received by the first reception means, and the determination result determined by the determination means And a transmission means for transmitting the detection result detected by the detection means to the second communication device.
[0010] また、請求項 12の発明にかかる運転支援方法は、合流地点に合流する 2つのルー トのうち一方のルートの近傍に設置されて 、る第 1の通信装置と、他方のルートの近 傍に設置されている第 2の通信装置とを用いた運転支援方法であって、前記第 1の 通信装置により、前記一方のルートを移動して 、る第 1の移動体の進行方向に関す る情報を前記第 1の移動体から受信する第 1の受信工程と、前記第 1の受信工程によ つて受信された進行方向に関する情報に基づいて、前記第 1の移動体が前記合流 地点に向力つて移動しているか否かを判断する判断工程と、前記判断工程によって 判断された判断結果を、前記第 2の通信装置に送信する第 1の送信工程と、前記第 2の通信装置により、前記第 1の送信工程によって送信された判断結果を受信する第 2の受信工程と、前記第 2の受信工程によって受信された判断結果を、前記他方の ルートを移動して ヽる第 2の移動体に送信する第 2の送信工程と、を含むことを特徴 とする。 [0010] Further, the driving support method according to the invention of claim 12 is provided in the vicinity of one of the two routes joining the joining point, and the first communication device and the other route are installed. A driving support method using a second communication device installed in the vicinity, wherein the first communication device moves along the one route in the traveling direction of the first moving body. A first receiving step for receiving information related to the first moving body, and based on the information about the traveling direction received by the first receiving step, the first moving body A determination step for determining whether or not the vehicle is moving, a first transmission step for transmitting the determination result determined by the determination step to the second communication device, and the second communication device To receive the determination result transmitted in the first transmission step. A second reception step, and a second transmission step of transmitting the determination result received in the second reception step to a second mobile body that travels along the other route. Features.
[0011] また、請求項 15の発明にかかる運転支援方法は、合流地点に合流する 2つのルー トのうち一方のルートの近傍に設置されて 、る第 1の通信装置と、他方のルートの近 傍に設置されている第 2の通信装置と、を用いる運転支援方法であって、前記第 1の 通信装置から、前記一方のルートを移動している第 1の移動体の進行方向に関する 情報を受信するとともに、前記第 1の移動体の移動速度に関する情報を連続的に受 信する受信工程と、前記受信工程によって受信された進行方向に関する情報に基 づいて、前記第 1の移動体が前記合流地点に向力つて移動しているか否かを判断す る判断工程と、前記判断工程によって前記合流地点に向かって移動していると判断 された場合、前記第 1の受信工程によって連続的に受信された移動速度に関する情 報に基づいて、前記移動速度の時間的変化を検出する検出工程と、前記判断工程 によって判断された判断結果と前記検出工程によって検出された検出結果とを、前 記第 2の通信装置に送信する送信工程と、を含むことを特徴とする。 [0012] また、請求項 16の発明に力かる運転支援プログラムは、請求項 12〜15のいずれ か一つに記載の運転支援方法をコンピュータに実行させることを特徴とする。 [0011] In addition, the driving support method according to the invention of claim 15 is provided in the vicinity of one of the two routes joining the joining point, and the first communication device and the other route are installed. A driving support method using a second communication device installed in the vicinity, the information on the traveling direction of the first moving body moving along the one route from the first communication device And receiving the information about the moving speed of the first moving body continuously, and based on the information about the traveling direction received by the receiving process, the first moving body A determination step for determining whether or not the vehicle is moving toward the confluence point, and if the determination step determines that the vehicle is moving toward the confluence point, the first reception step continuously The movement speed received The second communication device includes a detection step for detecting a temporal change in the moving speed based on information obtained, a determination result determined by the determination step, and a detection result detected by the detection step. A transmission step of transmitting to the network. [0012] Further, a driving support program according to the invention of claim 16 causes a computer to execute the driving support method according to any one of claims 12 to 15.
[0013] また、請求項 17の発明にかかる記録媒体は、請求項 16に記載の運転支援プログ ラムを記録したコンピュータに読み取り可能なことを特徴とする。  [0013] In addition, a recording medium according to the invention of claim 17 is readable by a computer that records the driving support program according to claim 16.
図面の簡単な説明  Brief Description of Drawings
[0014] [図 1]図 1は、実施の形態 1にかかる運転支援システムの機能的構成を示すブロック 図である。  FIG. 1 is a block diagram of a functional configuration of a driving support system according to a first embodiment.
[図 2]図 2は、第 1の通信装置の運転支援処理の手順を示すフローチャートである。  FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a procedure of a driving support process of the first communication device.
[図 3]図 3は、第 2の通信装置の運転支援処理の手順を示すフローチャートである。  FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing a procedure of a driving support process of the second communication device.
[図 4]図 4は、実施例 1にカゝかる運転支援システムが適用される交通状況を示す説明 図である。  [FIG. 4] FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing traffic conditions to which the driving support system according to the first embodiment is applied.
[図 5]図 5は、路側機のハードウェア構成を示すブロック図である。  FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing a hardware configuration of the roadside machine.
[図 6]図 6は、本線側路側機がおこなう運転支援処理の手順を示すフローチャートで ある。  [FIG. 6] FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing a procedure of driving support processing performed by the main line side roadside machine.
[図 7]図 7は、本線側路側機がおこなう運転支援処理の手順を示すフローチャートで ある。  [FIG. 7] FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing a procedure of driving support processing performed by the main roadside unit.
[図 8]図 8は、合流側路側機がおこなう運転支援処理の手順を示すフローチャートで ある。  [FIG. 8] FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing a procedure of driving support processing performed by the merging side roadside machine.
[図 9]図 9は、実施例 2にかかる運転支援システムが適用される交通状況を示す説明 図である。  [FIG. 9] FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing traffic conditions to which the driving support system according to the second embodiment is applied.
[図 10]図 10は、合流地点から最も遠い本線側路側機がおこなう運転支援処理の手 順を示すフローチャートである。  [FIG. 10] FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the driving support process performed by the main roadside unit farthest from the junction.
[図 11]図 11は、他の本線側路側機がおこなう運転支援処理の手順を示すフローチヤ ートである。  [FIG. 11] FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing the procedure of driving support processing performed by another main roadside unit.
[図 12]図 12は、合流地点から最も遠い合流側路側機がおこなう運転支援処理の手 順を示すフローチャートである。  [FIG. 12] FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing a procedure of a driving support process performed by a merging roadside device farthest from the merging point.
[図 13]図 13は、他の合流側路側機がおこなう運転支援処理の手順を示すフローチヤ ートである。 [図 14]図 14は、実施の形態 2にかかる運転支援システムの機能的構成を示すブロッ ク図である。 [FIG. 13] FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing a procedure of driving support processing performed by another merging side roadside machine. FIG. 14 is a block diagram of a functional configuration of the driving support system according to the second embodiment.
[図 15]図 15は、運転支援システムの運転支援処理の手順を示すフローチャートであ る。  FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the procedure of driving support processing of the driving support system.
[図 16]図 16は、実施例 1にかかる運転支援システムが適用される交通状況を示す説 明図である。  [FIG. 16] FIG. 16 is an explanatory diagram showing traffic conditions to which the driving support system according to Example 1 is applied.
[図 17]図 17は、本線側路側機がおこなう運転支援処理の手順を示すフローチャート である。  [FIG. 17] FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing a procedure of driving support processing performed by the main line side roadside machine.
[図 18]図 18は、合流側路側機がおこなう運転支援処理の手順を示すフローチャート である。  [FIG. 18] FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing a procedure of driving support processing performed by the merging side roadside machine.
[図 19]図 19は、実施例 2にかかる運転支援システムの運転支援処理の手順を示すフ ローチャートである。 符号の説明  FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing a procedure of driving support processing of the driving support system according to the second embodiment. Explanation of symbols
[0015] 100, 2100 運転支援システム [0015] 100, 2100 Driving support system
110, 2110 第 1の通信装置  110, 2110 First communication device
111, 121, 2111, 2121 受信部  111, 121, 2111, 2121 receiver
112, 2112 判断部  112, 2112 Judgment part
113 検出部  113 detector
114, 123, 2113, 2122 送信部  114, 123, 2113, 2122 Transmitter
120, 2120 第 2の通信装置  120, 2120 Second communication device
122 判定部  122 Judgment part
発明を実施するための最良の形態  BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION
[0016] 以下に添付図面を参照して、本発明にかかる運転支援システム、運転支援装置、 運転支援方法、運転支援プログラムおよび記録媒体の好適な実施の形態を詳細に 説明する。 [0016] Exemplary embodiments of a driving support system, a driving support device, a driving support method, a driving support program, and a recording medium according to the present invention will be described below in detail with reference to the accompanying drawings.
[0017] (実施の形態 1) [0017] (Embodiment 1)
はじめに、実施の形態 1にかかる運転支援システム 100の機能的構成にっ 、て説 明する。図 1は、実施の形態 1にかかる運転支援システムの機能的構成を示すブロッ ク図である。図 1のブロック図において、運転支援システム 100は、第 1の通信装置 1First, the functional configuration of the driving support system 100 according to the first embodiment will be described. Fig. 1 is a block diagram showing the functional configuration of the driving support system according to the first embodiment. FIG. In the block diagram of FIG. 1, the driving support system 100 is a first communication device 1
10と、第 2の通信装置 120とによって構成される。 10 and the second communication device 120.
[0018] 第 1の通信装置 110は、合流地点に合流する 2つのルートのうち一方のルートの近 傍に設置されている。また、第 2の通信装置 120は、合流地点に合流する 2つのルー トのうち他方のルートの近傍に設置されて 、る。 [0018] The first communication device 110 is installed in the vicinity of one of the two routes joining the joining point. In addition, the second communication device 120 is installed in the vicinity of the other route out of the two routes joining the joining point.
[0019] 第 1の通信装置 110は、受信部 111、判断部 112、検出部 113、送信部 114によつ て構成される。受信部 111は、第 1の通信装置 110が近傍に設置されている一方の ルートを移動している第 1の移動体の進行方向に関する情報を受信するとともに、第 1の移動体の移動速度に関する情報を連続的に受信する。また、受信部 111は、後 述する第 2の通信装置 120の送信部 123から判定部 122の判定結果が送信された 場合には、送信された判定結果を受信する。 The first communication device 110 includes a reception unit 111, a determination unit 112, a detection unit 113, and a transmission unit 114. The receiving unit 111 receives information related to the traveling direction of the first moving body moving along one route where the first communication device 110 is installed in the vicinity, and also relates to the moving speed of the first moving body. Receive information continuously. In addition, when the determination result of the determination unit 122 is transmitted from the transmission unit 123 of the second communication device 120 described later, the reception unit 111 receives the transmitted determination result.
[0020] 受信部 111は、たとえば、自装置の近傍を通過する移動体に搭載された通信機に 対して、移動方向や移動速度に関する情報の取得要求信号を送信し、返信された 情報を受信する。また、たとえば、移動体に対して速度計測用電波を発射し、その反 射波を受信することによって移動方向および移動速度を得ることとしてもよい。  [0020] For example, the reception unit 111 transmits an acquisition request signal for information on the moving direction and moving speed to a communication device mounted on a mobile body that passes in the vicinity of the own device, and receives the returned information. To do. Further, for example, the moving direction and the moving speed may be obtained by emitting a velocity measurement radio wave to the moving body and receiving the reflected wave.
[0021] ここで、移動体の進行方向に関する情報とは、たとえば、第 1の移動体に搭載され た通信機から送信される移動体の移動方向情報や目的地点情報などである。また、 移動速度に関する情報とは、たとえば、第 1の移動体に搭載された通信機から送信さ れる現在速度情報や、前述した速度計測用電波の反射波などである。  [0021] Here, the information related to the traveling direction of the moving body is, for example, moving direction information or destination point information of the moving body transmitted from a communication device mounted on the first moving body. The information on the moving speed is, for example, current speed information transmitted from a communication device mounted on the first moving body, the reflected wave of the speed measuring radio wave described above, and the like.
[0022] また、連続的に受信する、とは、第 1の移動体と常時接続して情報を受信してもよい し、一定時間ごとの情報の受信を継続するものであってもよい。具体的には、たとえ ば、第 1の移動体に対して、一定時間ごとに情報の取得要求信号を送信し、返信さ れる情報を受信する。  [0022] Further, continuously receiving may be information that is always connected to the first mobile unit, or may continue to receive information at regular intervals. Specifically, for example, an information acquisition request signal is transmitted to the first mobile unit at regular intervals, and the returned information is received.
[0023] 判断部 112は、受信部 111によって受信された進行方向に関する情報に基づいて 、第 1の移動体が合流地点に向力つて移動している力否かを判断する。判断部 112 は、具体的には、たとえば、第 1の移動体の進行方向が変化しないまま、道なりに走 行した場合、合流地点に到達する力否かによって、第 1の移動体が合流地点に向か つて移動して!/ヽるカゝ否かを判断する。 [0024] 検出部 113は、判断部 112によって合流地点に向力つて移動していると判断された 場合、受信部 111によって連続的に受信された移動速度に関する情報に基づいて、 移動速度の時間的変化を検出する。検出部 113は、具体的には、たとえば、受信部 111が受信する移動速度に関する情報を記憶しておき、今回受信された情報と前回 受信された情報とを比較する。そして、今回受信された情報と前回受信された情報と が異なる場合は変化あり、今回受信された情報と前回受信された情報とが等しい場 合は変化なし、と検出する。 [0023] Based on the information on the traveling direction received by the receiving unit 111, the determining unit 112 determines whether or not the first moving body is moving toward the joining point. Specifically, the determination unit 112, for example, if the traveling direction of the first moving body does not change and the vehicle travels along the road, the first moving body joins depending on whether or not the force reaches the joining point. Move towards the point and determine if it is! [0024] When it is determined by the determination unit 112 that the detection unit 113 is moving toward the joining point, the detection unit 113 is based on the information regarding the movement speed continuously received by the reception unit 111. Change is detected. Specifically, for example, the detection unit 113 stores information on the moving speed received by the reception unit 111, and compares the information received this time with the information received last time. Then, it is detected that there is a change when the information received this time is different from the information received last time, and no change is detected when the information received this time is the same as the information received last time.
[0025] また、検出部 113は、第 1の移動体の現在位置と合流地点間の距離とに基づいて、 合流地点に到達する時間の移動速度ごとの変化を検出することとしてもよい。この場 合、検出部 113は、たとえば、第 1の移動体から、その現在位置を示す現在位置情 報を取得し、現在位置力も合流地点までの距離を算出する。そして、算出した距離を 移動速度で除算することによって、第 1の移動体が合流地点に到達する時間(以下、 合流時間という)を算出する。  [0025] In addition, the detection unit 113 may detect a change for each moving speed of the time to reach the joining point based on the current position of the first moving body and the distance between the joining points. In this case, for example, the detection unit 113 acquires current position information indicating the current position from the first moving body, and calculates the current position force and the distance to the merge point. Then, by dividing the calculated distance by the moving speed, the time for the first moving body to reach the confluence point (hereinafter referred to as the confluence time) is calculated.
[0026] また、検出部 113は、たとえば、装置本体が一方のルートの近傍に設置されている 場合、装置本体の位置を第 1の移動体の位置に近似して、第 1の移動体の移動速度 に関する情報と、装置本体と合流地点間の距離と、に基づいて、第 1の移動体の合 流時間を算出することとしてもよい。すなわち、装置本体と合流地点間の距離を、第 1 の移動体の速度で除算することによって、合流時間を算出することとしてもよい。  [0026] In addition, for example, when the apparatus main body is installed in the vicinity of one route, the detection unit 113 approximates the position of the apparatus main body to the position of the first moving body, and The merging time of the first moving body may be calculated based on the information on the moving speed and the distance between the apparatus main body and the merging point. That is, the merging time may be calculated by dividing the distance between the apparatus main body and the merging point by the speed of the first moving body.
[0027] 検出部 113は、受信部 111が連続的に受信する移動速度に関する情報をすベて 用いて合流時間を算出してもよいし、連続的に受信する情報を一定間隔で間引いて 合流時間を算出してもよい。なお、合流地点に到達する時間(合流時間)とは、時刻 のように時間軸上の一点を特定するものでもよ 、し、時間帯のように一定の幅がある 時間であってもよい。  [0027] The detecting unit 113 may calculate the merging time by using all the information on the moving speed continuously received by the receiving unit 111, or the information received continuously is thinned out at a fixed interval. You may calculate time. The time to reach the meeting point (joining time) may be one that specifies a point on the time axis such as time, or may be a time having a certain range such as a time zone.
[0028] 送信部 114は、判断部 112によって判断された判断結果と検出部 113によって検 出された検出結果とを、第 2の通信装置 120に送信する。なお、判断部 112によって 、第 1の移動体は合流地点に向力つて移動していないと判断された場合には、送信 部 114による情報の送信は省略してもよ 、。  Transmitter 114 transmits the determination result determined by determination unit 112 and the detection result detected by detection unit 113 to second communication device 120. If the determination unit 112 determines that the first moving body is not moving to the joining point, the transmission of the information by the transmission unit 114 may be omitted.
[0029] また、送信部 114は、受信部 111が後述する第 2の通信装置 120の送信部 123か ら判定部 122の判定結果を受信した場合は、受信した判定結果を第 1の移動体に送 信する。 [0029] Further, the transmission unit 114 is a transmission unit 123 of the second communication device 120, which will be described later. When the determination result of the determination unit 122 is received, the received determination result is transmitted to the first mobile unit.
[0030] つぎに、第 2の通信装置 120の機能的構成について説明する。第 2の通信装置 12 0は、受信部 121、判定部 122、送信部 123によって構成される。受信部 121は、第 1の通信装置 110の送信部 114によって送信された判断結果および検出結果を受 信する。また、受信部 121は、送信部 114による判断結果および検出結果の送信前 後における第 2の移動体の移動速度に関する情報を受信することとしてもよい。  Next, the functional configuration of the second communication device 120 will be described. The second communication device 120 includes a reception unit 121, a determination unit 122, and a transmission unit 123. The reception unit 121 receives the determination result and the detection result transmitted by the transmission unit 114 of the first communication device 110. The receiving unit 121 may receive information on the moving speed of the second moving body before and after transmitting the determination result and the detection result by the transmitting unit 114.
[0031] 判定部 122は、受信部 121によって第 2の移動体の移動速度に関する情報が受信 された場合、その情報の送信前後における移動速度に基づいて、第 1および第 2の 移動体の衝突可能性を判定する。判定部 122は、たとえば、受信部 121によって受 信された移動速度が情報の送信前後において変化している場合、第 1および第 2の 移動体それぞれの合流時間の差分を算出する。そして、合流時間の差分が所定時 間以内の場合、衝突可能性があると判断する。  [0031] When information related to the moving speed of the second moving body is received by the receiving section 121, the determining unit 122 collides the first and second moving bodies based on the moving speed before and after the transmission of the information. Determine the possibility. For example, when the moving speed received by the receiving unit 121 changes before and after the transmission of information, the determining unit 122 calculates the difference between the merging times of the first and second moving bodies. If the difference in merging time is within a predetermined time, it is determined that there is a possibility of collision.
[0032] 送信部 123は、受信部 121によって受信された判断結果および検出結果を、合流 地点に合流する 2つのルートのうち他方のルートを移動している第 2の移動体に送信 する。また、送信部 123は、判定部 122によって判定された判定結果を、第 1の通信 装置 110に送信する。  [0032] The transmission unit 123 transmits the determination result and the detection result received by the reception unit 121 to the second moving body that is moving on the other route out of the two routes that join the joining point. In addition, the transmission unit 123 transmits the determination result determined by the determination unit 122 to the first communication device 110.
[0033] つぎに、運転支援システム 100の運転支援処理の手順について説明する。ここで は、第 1の通信装置 110における処理と、第 2の通信装置 120における処理とを分け て説明する。図 2は、第 1の通信装置の運転支援処理の手順を示すフローチャートで ある。図 2において、まず、第 1の通信装置 110は、受信部 111によって、第 1の移動 体の移動速度に関する情報を連続的に受信する (ステップ S201)。また、受信部 11 1によって、第 1の移動体の進行方向に関する情報を受信する (ステップ S202)。  Next, a procedure of driving support processing of the driving support system 100 will be described. Here, processing in first communication device 110 and processing in second communication device 120 will be described separately. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the driving support process of the first communication device. In FIG. 2, first, the first communication device 110 continuously receives information on the moving speed of the first moving body by the receiving unit 111 (step S201). In addition, the receiving unit 111 receives information related to the traveling direction of the first moving body (step S202).
[0034] つぎに、判断部 112によって、第 1の移動体が合流地点に向力つて移動しているか 否かを判断する (ステップ S203)。合流地点に向かって移動している場合は (ステツ プ S203 : Yes)、検出部 113によって、移動速度の変化を検出する (ステップ S204)  Next, the determination unit 112 determines whether or not the first moving body is moving toward the joining point (step S203). When moving toward the junction (step S203: Yes), the detection unit 113 detects a change in the moving speed (step S204).
[0035] そして、ステップ S203で得られた判断結果およびステップ S204で得られた検出結 果を第 2の通信装置 120に送信する (ステップ S205)。一方、合流地点に向力つて移 動していない場合は (ステップ S203 :No)、ステップ S201に戻り、以降の処理を繰り 返す。 [0035] Then, the determination result obtained in step S203 and the detection result obtained in step S204. The result is transmitted to the second communication device 120 (step S205). On the other hand, when it is not moving to the merging point by force (step S203: No), the process returns to step S201, and the subsequent processing is repeated.
[0036] ステップ S205において、判断結果および検出結果を第 2の通信装置 120に送信し た場合、第 1の通信装置 110は、受信部 111によって、第 2の通信装置 120の判定 部 122による判定結果を受信した力否かを判断する (ステップ S206)。判定結果を受 信した場合は (ステップ S206 : Yes)、送信部 114によって、受信した判定結果を第 1 の移動体に送信して (ステップ S207)、本フローチャートによる処理を終了する。一 方、判定結果を受信しな力つた場合は (ステップ S206 :No)、ステップ S201に戻り、 以降の処理を継続する。  [0036] When the determination result and the detection result are transmitted to the second communication device 120 in step S205, the first communication device 110 is determined by the determination unit 122 of the second communication device 120 by the reception unit 111. It is determined whether or not the result has been received (step S206). When the determination result is received (step S206: Yes), the transmission unit 114 transmits the received determination result to the first mobile body (step S207), and the processing according to this flowchart is terminated. On the other hand, if the determination result is not received (step S206: No), the process returns to step S201 and the subsequent processing is continued.
[0037] つぎに、第 2の通信装置 120がおこなう運転支援処理の手順について説明する。  [0037] Next, the procedure of the driving support process performed by the second communication device 120 will be described.
図 3は、第 2の通信装置の運転支援処理の手順を示すフローチャートである。図 3に おいて、まず、第 2の通信装置 120は、受信部 121によって、第 1の通信装置 110か ら送信された判断結果および検出結果を受信するまで待機する (ステップ S301 :No のループ)。  FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the driving support process of the second communication device. In FIG. 3, first, the second communication device 120 waits until the reception unit 121 receives the determination result and the detection result transmitted from the first communication device 110 (step S301: No loop). ).
[0038] 判断結果および検出結果を受信した場合は (ステップ S301: Yes)、受信した判断 結果および検出結果を第 2の移動体に送信し (ステップ S302)、受信部 121によって 、判断結果および検出結果の送信前後における第 2の移動体の移動速度に関する 情報を受信する (ステップ S303)。そして、判定部 122によって、第 1の移動体と第 2 の移動体とに衝突可能性がある力否かを判断する (ステップ S304)。  [0038] When the determination result and the detection result are received (step S301: Yes), the received determination result and the detection result are transmitted to the second mobile unit (step S302), and the reception unit 121 determines the determination result and the detection result. Information on the moving speed of the second moving body before and after the transmission of the result is received (step S303). Then, the determination unit 122 determines whether or not there is a possibility of collision between the first moving body and the second moving body (step S304).
[0039] 衝突可能性がある場合は (ステップ S304 : Yes)、第 1の移動体と第 2の移動体とに 衝突可能性がある旨の情報を第 1の通信装置 110に送信して (ステップ S305)、本フ ローチャートによる処理を終了する。このとき、第 1の通信装置 120と同時に、第 2の 移動体に対して衝突可能性がある旨の情報を送信してもよい。一方、衝突可能性が な 、場合は (ステップ S304: No)、衝突可能性はな 、旨の情報を第 1の通信装置 11 0に送信して (ステップ S306)、本フローチャートによる処理を終了する。なお、衝突 可能性がな ヽ場合は、情報の送信を省略することとしてもょ ヽ。  [0039] If there is a possibility of collision (step S304: Yes), information indicating that there is a possibility of collision between the first mobile unit and the second mobile unit is transmitted to the first communication device 110 ( Step S305), the process according to this flowchart is terminated. At this time, simultaneously with the first communication device 120, information indicating the possibility of a collision may be transmitted to the second mobile unit. On the other hand, if there is no possibility of collision (step S304: No), information indicating that there is no possibility of collision is transmitted to the first communication device 110 (step S306), and the processing according to this flowchart ends. . If there is no possibility of a collision, the transmission of information may be omitted.
[0040] 以上説明したように、運転支援システム 100によれば、合流地点に合流する 2つの ルートのうち、一方のルートから合流地点に向力つて移動している第 1の移動体の有 無につ 、ての情報を、他方のルートを移動して 、る第 2の移動体に送信することがで きる。これにより、第 2の移動体は、合流地点において第 1の移動体と衝突する可能 性があるかどうかを知ることができる。 [0040] As described above, according to the driving support system 100, two Among the routes, information on the presence or absence of the first moving body moving from one route to the meeting point is transmitted to the second moving body moving on the other route. can do. As a result, the second moving body can know whether or not there is a possibility of colliding with the first moving body at the junction.
[0041] また、判断結果とともに第 1の移動体の移動速度の変化に関する検出結果を、第 2 の移動体に送信する。これにより、合流地点での衝突を回避するための策を講じる際 に判断材料となる情報を、第 2の移動体の運転者に与えることができる。さらに、移動 速度に関する情報を元に、第 1の移動体が合流地点に到達する時間の変化を検出 し、第 2の移動体に送信することによって、より詳細な判断材料を与えることができる。  [0041] In addition to the determination result, the detection result regarding the change in the moving speed of the first moving body is transmitted to the second moving body. As a result, it is possible to give information to the driver of the second moving body as a judgment material when taking measures to avoid a collision at the junction. Furthermore, based on the information on the moving speed, it is possible to provide a more detailed judgment material by detecting a change in the time at which the first moving body reaches the meeting point and transmitting it to the second moving body.
[0042] また、第 1の移動体と第 2の移動体との衝突可能性があるかを判断し、第 1の移動 体に送信する。これにより、第 1の移動体の運転者に対しても、合流地点での衝突を 回避するための策を講じる際に判断材料となる情報を与えることができる。さらに、第 1の移動体の移動速度に関する情報を連続的に受信し、検出した移動速度の変化 を第 2の移動体に送信する。これにより、第 2の移動体では、合流地点に至るまでの ルートにおいて、第 1の移動体の変化に応じて衝突回避のための動作をおこなうこと ができる。  [0042] Further, it is determined whether or not there is a possibility of collision between the first moving body and the second moving body, and is transmitted to the first moving body. As a result, the driver of the first moving body can be provided with information that can be used as a judgment material when taking measures to avoid a collision at the junction. In addition, information on the moving speed of the first moving body is continuously received, and the detected change in moving speed is transmitted to the second moving body. As a result, the second moving body can perform an operation for avoiding a collision in accordance with the change of the first moving body on the route to the merging point.
[0043] また、装置本体の位置を第 1の移動体の位置と近似することによって、第 1の移動 体から位置に関する情報を受信しなくても、合流地点に到達する時間を算出すること ができ、第 1の移動体力 受信する情報を軽減することができる。  [0043] Further, by approximating the position of the apparatus main body to the position of the first moving body, it is possible to calculate the time to reach the merging point without receiving information on the position from the first moving body. Yes, the first mobile strength can reduce the information received.
[0044] なお、本実施の形態 1においては、第 1の移動体と第 2の移動体とに衝突可能性が あるか否かは、第 2の通信装置 120で判断した力 第 1の通信装置 110で判断しても よい。この場合、判定部 122を第 1の通信装置 110に設け、図 3のステップ S303で受 信した第 2の移動体の移動速度に関する情報は、第 1の通信装置 110に送信される 。そして、第 1の通信装置 110の判定部 122で衝突可能性がある力否かの判断をお こな ヽ、判定結果を第 1の移動体および第 2の通信装置 120に送信する。  In the first embodiment, whether or not there is a possibility of collision between the first moving body and the second moving body is the force determined by the second communication device 120 in the first communication It may be judged by the device 110. In this case, the determination unit 122 is provided in the first communication device 110, and the information regarding the moving speed of the second moving body received in step S303 in FIG. 3 is transmitted to the first communication device 110. The determination unit 122 of the first communication device 110 determines whether or not there is a possibility of collision, and transmits the determination result to the first mobile unit and the second communication device 120.
[0045] また、第 1の通信装置 110および第 2の通信装置 120と、通信可能な通信サーバを 設けることとしてもよい。この場合、第 1の通信装置 110は、第 1の移動体の進行方向 に関する情報を受信するとともに、第 1の移動体の移動速度に関する情報を連続的 に受信し、受信結果を通信サーバに送信する。通信サーバは、図 2のステップ S 203 およびステップ S204の判断および検出をおこな 、、判断結果および検出結果を第 2 の通信装置 120に送信する。 [0045] In addition, a communication server capable of communicating with the first communication device 110 and the second communication device 120 may be provided. In this case, the first communication device 110 receives information related to the traveling direction of the first moving body and continuously transmits information related to the moving speed of the first moving body. And the reception result is transmitted to the communication server. The communication server performs the determination and detection in step S 203 and step S 204 in FIG. 2, and transmits the determination result and the detection result to the second communication device 120.
[0046] この場合、通信サーバは、さらに第 2の通信装置 120から判断結果および検出結 果の送信前後における第 2の移動体の移動速度に関する情報を受信し、第 1の移動 体と第 2の移動体とに衝突可能性がある力否かを判断することとしてもよい。このよう に通信サーバを設置することによって、ルートの近傍に設置する通信装置の構成を 簡易化することができる。  [0046] In this case, the communication server further receives information on the moving speed of the second mobile body before and after transmission of the determination result and the detection result from the second communication device 120, and the first mobile body and the second mobile body It may be determined whether or not there is a possibility of collision with the moving body. By installing the communication server in this way, the configuration of the communication device installed near the route can be simplified.
[0047] (実施例 1)  [Example 1]
つぎに、上述した実施の形態 1にかかる運転支援システム 100の実施例 1につ 、て 説明する。以下の実施例においては、運転支援システム 100を道路脇に設置された 路側機 430, 440および、車両 410, 420に搭載された通信機 411, 421からなる運 転支援システム 400に適用した場合について説明する。  Next, Example 1 of the driving support system 100 according to the first embodiment will be described. In the following embodiment, the driving support system 100 is applied to the driving support system 400 including the roadside devices 430 and 440 installed on the side of the road and the communication devices 411 and 421 mounted on the vehicles 410 and 420. explain.
[0048] まず、実施例 1にかかる運転支援システム 400が適用される交通状況について説 明する。図 4は、実施例 1にかかる運転支援システムが適用される交通状況を示す説 明図である。図 4において、合流地点の一例として、高速道路の本線 L1と合流車線 L2とが交差する合流地点 Pが図示されている。合流地点 Pの周辺には、移動体の一 ί列として車両 410 (410a〜410c) , 420 (420a, 420b)力走行して! /、る。車両 410は 本線 L1を走行する車両、車両 420は合流車線 L2を走行する車両である。  [0048] First, the traffic situation to which the driving support system 400 according to the first embodiment is applied will be described. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a traffic situation to which the driving support system according to the first embodiment is applied. In FIG. 4, a confluence point P where the main road L1 and the confluence lane L2 of the expressway intersect is shown as an example of the confluence. In the vicinity of the confluence point P, drive the vehicle 410 (410a to 410c), 420 (420a, 420b) as a line of moving objects! The vehicle 410 is a vehicle traveling on the main line L1, and the vehicle 420 is a vehicle traveling on the merge lane L2.
[0049] 車両 410, 420に ίま、それぞれ通信機 411 (411 a〜411c) , 421 (421a, 421b) が搭載されている。通信機 411, 421は、車両 410, 420がそれぞれ走行する道路 脇に設置された路側機 430, 440と交信し、自車の走行情報を送信したり、運転支援 情報を受信したりする。  [0049] Communication devices 411 (411a to 411c) and 421 (421a and 421b) are mounted on vehicles 410 and 420, respectively. The communication devices 411 and 421 communicate with roadside devices 430 and 440 installed on the sides of the roads on which the vehicles 410 and 420 travel, respectively, and transmit their own vehicle travel information and receive driving support information.
[0050] また、車両 410, 420は、それぞれ自車を特定する IDが、たとえば、 IPアドレスのよ うに、それぞれの車両 410, 420に一意に割り振られている。この IDは、運転支援シ ステム 400にお!/ヽて通信用アドレスに用!ヽられ、通信機 411, 421ίま、車両 410, 42 0の IDを用いて特定の車両 410, 420に情報を送信することができる。それぞれの車 両 410, 420の IDは、それぞれの通信機 411, 421に記 '慮されている。 [0051] 路側機 430は、本線 L1の近傍に設置されており、本線 L1を走行し、路側機 430の 側を通過する車両 410の通信機 411と交信する。また、路側機 440は、合流車線 L2 の近傍に設置されており、合流車線 L2を走行し、路側機 440の側を通過する車両 4 20の通信機 421と交信する。以下、路側機 430を本線側路側機 430、路側機 440を 合流側路側機 440という。 [0050] In addition, each vehicle 410, 420 has an ID for identifying its own vehicle uniquely assigned to each vehicle 410, 420, such as an IP address. This ID is given to the driver assistance system 400 and used as a communication address, and information is sent to the specific vehicle 410, 420 using the ID of the communication device 411, 421ί or the vehicle 410, 420. Can be sent. The ID of each vehicle 410, 420 is stored in each communication device 411, 421. [0051] The roadside device 430 is installed in the vicinity of the main line L1, travels on the main line L1, and communicates with the communication device 411 of the vehicle 410 passing the roadside device 430 side. The roadside device 440 is installed in the vicinity of the merging lane L2, travels on the merging lane L2, and communicates with the communication device 421 of the vehicle 420 passing through the roadside 440 side. Hereinafter, the roadside machine 430 is referred to as a main line side roadside machine 430, and the roadside machine 440 is referred to as a merge side roadside machine 440.
[0052] 本線側路側機 430、合流側路側機 440の通信範囲は、それぞれ図 4中の点線で 示すエリア A, B (以下、通信エリア A, Bという)である。通信エリア A, Bは、それぞれ 合流地点 Pを含み、エリア内をそれぞれ異なる速度で走行し、かつ、同時刻に合流 地点 Pに達する車両 410, 420とそれぞれ交信可能である。また、本線側路側機 430 と合流側路側機 440は、相互に通信することができる。  [0052] The communication ranges of the main line side roadside machine 430 and the merge side roadside machine 440 are areas A and B (hereinafter referred to as communication areas A and B) indicated by dotted lines in FIG. Communication areas A and B each include a junction P, and can communicate with vehicles 410 and 420 that travel at different speeds in the area and reach the junction P at the same time. In addition, the main line side roadside machine 430 and the merge side roadside machine 440 can communicate with each other.
[0053] 本線側路側機 430と合流側路側機 440は、それぞれ、本線 L1あるいは合流車線 L 2の平均的な速度で車両 410, 420が走行した場合に、合流地点 Pに到着するまで かかる時間が等しくなる距離 (以下、等時間距離という)に設置される。たとえば、本 線 L1の平均速度が 80kmZh、合流車線 L2の平均速度が 50kmZhの場合、本線 側路側機 430は合流地点 Pから約 2670m、合流側路側機 440は合流地点 Pから約 1670mにそれぞれ設けられる。これにより、それぞれの路側機 430は、合流地点 P に到達するまで 120秒の等時間距離に設けられることとなる。  [0053] The time required for the main roadside machine 430 and the merging side roadside machine 440 to arrive at the merging point P when the vehicles 410 and 420 travel at the average speed of the main line L1 or the merging lane L2, respectively. Installed at the same distance (hereinafter referred to as equal time distance). For example, if the average speed of the main line L1 is 80kmZh and the average speed of the merging lane L2 is 50kmZh, the main roadside machine 430 is installed approximately 2670m from the merge point P, and the merger roadside machine 440 is installed approximately 1670m from the merge point P. It is done. As a result, each roadside machine 430 is provided at an equidistant distance of 120 seconds until reaching the junction P.
[0054] ここで、運転支援システム 400がおこなう運転支援の概要を説明する。本線側路側 機 430は、本線 L1を走行する車両 410から車両 IDや走行方向、走行速度などの情 報を受信し、それぞれの車両 410が合流地点 Pに到達する時刻(以下、合流時刻と いう)を算出し、保存している。また、合流側路側機 440は、合流車線 L2を走行する 車両 420から車両 IDや走行方向、走行速度などの情報を受信し、車両 420の合流 時刻を算出する。そして、本線側路側機 430に対して、衝突可能性がある車両 410 力 Sある力を照合要求する。  [0054] Here, an outline of driving assistance performed by the driving assistance system 400 will be described. The main roadside unit 430 receives information such as the vehicle ID, the traveling direction, and the traveling speed from the vehicle 410 traveling on the main line L1, and the time at which each vehicle 410 reaches the merge point P (hereinafter referred to as the merge time). ) Is calculated and saved. Further, the merging side roadside machine 440 receives information such as a vehicle ID, a traveling direction, and a traveling speed from the vehicle 420 traveling on the merging lane L2, and calculates a merging time of the vehicle 420. Then, a verification request is made to the main road side roadside machine 430 for a vehicle 410 force S with a possibility of collision.
[0055] 本線側路側機 430は、車両 420の合流時刻と保存している車両 410の合流時刻を 照合し、合流時刻が所定時間内の車両 410がある場合には、衝突可能性があるとし て合流側路側機 440に警告情報を送信する。合流側路側機 440は、本線側路側機 430から警告情報を受信すると、合流車線 L2を走行する車両 420の通信機 421に 警告情報を送信する。通信機 421では、警告情報の内容を表示したり、音声出力し たりして、車両 420の運転者に車両 410との衝突可能性を報知して、減速や車線変 更など衝突回避のための措置を講じるよう促す。 [0055] The main roadside unit 430 collates the merging time of the vehicle 420 with the stored merging time of the vehicle 410, and if there is a vehicle 410 within the predetermined merging time, there is a possibility of collision. The warning information is transmitted to the confluence side roadside machine 440. Upon receiving the warning information from the main line side roadside machine 430, the junction side roadside machine 440 sends the information to the communication device 421 of the vehicle 420 traveling on the merged lane L2. Send warning information. The communicator 421 displays the contents of warning information or outputs a sound to inform the driver of the vehicle 420 of the possibility of a collision with the vehicle 410 to avoid collision such as deceleration or lane change. Encourage them to take action.
[0056] 一方、本線側路側機 430では、車両 420との衝突可能性がある車両 410 (以下、監 視対象車両という)について、合流地点 Pに達するまで継続的に交信し、その速度と 位置を常にモニターして合流時刻の変化を把握する。そして、合流時刻の変化があ れば、その都度合流側路側機 440に送信する。合流側路側機 440は、本線側路側 機 430からの情報を元に、監視対象車両と車両 420の衝突可能性をモニターし、衝 突可能性が消えなければ車両 420への警告情報の送信を継続する。なお、監視対 象車両は複数の車両 410であってもよい。以上のような処理によって、運転支援シス テム 400は、車両 410、 420の運転を支援する。  [0056] On the other hand, main roadside roadside machine 430 continuously communicates with vehicle 410 that may collide with vehicle 420 (hereinafter referred to as the vehicle to be monitored) until it reaches junction P, and its speed and position. To monitor changes in merging time. Then, whenever there is a change in the merging time, it is transmitted to the merging side roadside device 440 each time. The merge side roadside machine 440 monitors the possibility of collision between the monitored vehicle and the vehicle 420 based on the information from the main line side roadside machine 430, and sends warning information to the vehicle 420 if the collision possibility disappears. continue. The monitored vehicle may be a plurality of vehicles 410. The driving support system 400 supports the driving of the vehicles 410 and 420 by the processing as described above.
[0057] なお、以下の実施例では、合流地点は高速道路の本線 L1と合流車線 L2の合流地 点 Pとしたが、この他、合流地点は、信号機が設けられていない交差点、または、信 号機が設けられて 、る交差点であってもよ 、。信号機が設けられて 、な 、交差点に おいては、交差する車線力 進入する他の車両の動きを知ることができず、事故が発 生する可能性が高い。また、信号機が設けられている交差点であっても、夜間点滅 式信号機の場合や、信号無視をして走行する他の車両がある場合などは、他の車両 との衝突可能性を判断する必要が生じるためである。  [0057] In the following examples, the junction point is the junction point P of the main road L1 and the junction lane L2, but the junction point is an intersection where no traffic signal is provided or a signal. It may be an intersection where a unit is installed. If there is a traffic light at the intersection, the movement of other vehicles entering the intersecting lane force cannot be known, and there is a high possibility that an accident will occur. Even at intersections where traffic lights are provided, it is necessary to determine the possibility of collision with other vehicles, such as at night flashing traffic lights or when there are other vehicles traveling with neglected signals. This is because.
[0058] また、以下の実施例では、 2つの道路が合流する合流地点を例に説明する力 2つ の道路が交差する四叉路ゃ三叉路、五叉路などであってもよい。これらの合流地点 でも、他の車両との衝突可能性を判断する必要が生じるためである。この場合、たと えば、合流地点に到達しょうとする車両 (以下の実施例では車両 420)は、交差する 道路それぞれの近傍に設置された路側機力も警告情報などの提供を受ける。  [0058] In addition, in the following embodiments, a force for explaining an example of a junction where two roads meet may be a four-fork road where two roads intersect, a three-way road, a five-way road, or the like. This is because it is necessary to judge the possibility of collision with other vehicles even at these junctions. In this case, for example, a vehicle (vehicle 420 in the following embodiment) that is about to reach a junction receives road information provided in the vicinity of each intersecting road and is provided with warning information.
[0059] さらに、以下の実施例では、本線側路側機 430に、合流側路側機 440が照合要求 することとするが、合流側路側機 440に対して、本線側路側機 430が照合要求をおこ なうこととしてもよい。この場合、以下に説明する本線側路側機 430および合流側路 側機 440の処理をそれぞれ逆に読み替えればよい。  [0059] Further, in the following embodiment, the merging side roadside device 440 requests verification of the main line side roadside device 430, but the mainline side roadside device 430 requests verification of the merging side roadside device 440. It may be done. In this case, the processing of the main line side roadside machine 430 and the merge side roadside machine 440 described below may be read in reverse.
[0060] (路側機 430, 440のハードウェア構成) つぎに、路側機 430, 440のハードウェア構成について説明する。図 5は、路側機 のハードウェア構成を示すブロック図である。図 5において、路側機 430, 440は、 C PU501と、 ROM502と、 RAM503と、磁気ディスクドライブ 504と、磁気ディスク 50 5と、光ディスクドライブ 506と、光ディスク 507と、音声 IZF (インターフェース) 508と 、マイク 509と、スピーカ 510と、入力デバイス 511と、映像 IZF512と、ディスプレイ 5 13と、通信 IZF (インターフェース) 514と、を備えている。また、各構成部 501〜51 4はバス 520によってそれぞれ接続されて!、る。 [0060] (Hardware configuration of roadside machines 430 and 440) Next, the hardware configuration of the roadside machines 430 and 440 will be described. Fig. 5 is a block diagram showing the hardware configuration of the roadside machine. In FIG. 5, roadside machines 430 and 440 include a CPU 501, a ROM 502, a RAM 503, a magnetic disk drive 504, a magnetic disk 505, an optical disk drive 506, an optical disk 507, an audio IZF (interface) 508, A microphone 509, a speaker 510, an input device 511, a video IZF 512, a display 513, and a communication IZF (interface) 514 are provided. Also, the components 501 to 514 are connected by a bus 520 !.
[0061] まず、 CPU501は、路側機 430, 440の全体の制御を司る。 ROM502は、ブート プログラム、通信プログラム、データベース作成プログラム、データ解析プログラムな どのプログラムを記録している。また、 RAM503は、 CPU501のワークエリアとして使 用される。 First, the CPU 501 governs overall control of the roadside machines 430 and 440. The ROM 502 records programs such as a boot program, a communication program, a database creation program, and a data analysis program. The RAM 503 is used as a work area for the CPU 501.
[0062] 磁気ディスクドライブ 504は、 CPU501の制御にしたがって磁気ディスク 505に対 するデータの読み取り Z書き込みを制御する。磁気ディスク 505は、磁気ディスクドラ イブ 504の制御で書き込まれたデータを記録する。磁気ディスク 505としては、たとえ ば、 HD (ノヽードディスク)や FD (フレキシブルディスク)を用いることができる。  The magnetic disk drive 504 controls reading and writing of data with respect to the magnetic disk 505 according to the control of the CPU 501. The magnetic disk 505 records data written under the control of the magnetic disk drive 504. As the magnetic disk 505, for example, HD (node disk) or FD (flexible disk) can be used.
[0063] また、光ディスクドライブ 506は、 CPU501の制御にしたがって光ディスク 507に対 するデータの読み取り Z書き込みを制御する。光ディスク 507は、光ディスクドライブ 506の制御にしたがってデータの読み出される着脱自在な記録媒体である。光ディ スク 507は、書き込み可能な記録媒体を利用することもできる。また、この着脱可能な 記録媒体として、光ディスク 507のほ力 MO、メモリカードなどであってもよい。  In addition, the optical disk drive 506 controls reading and writing of data with respect to the optical disk 507 according to the control of the CPU 501. The optical disc 507 is a detachable recording medium from which data is read according to the control of the optical disc drive 506. The optical disk 507 can use a writable recording medium. The removable recording medium may be a power MO of the optical disc 507, a memory card, or the like.
[0064] また、音声 IZF508は、音声入力用のマイク 509および音声出力用のスピーカ 51 0に接続される。マイク 509に受音された音声は、音声 IZF508内で AZD変換され る。また、スピーカ 510からは音声が出力される。また、入力デバイス 511は、文字、 数値、各種指示などの入力のための複数のキーを備えたリモコン、キーボード、マウ ス、タツチパネルなどが挙げられる。  The audio IZF 508 is connected to a microphone 509 for audio input and a speaker 510 for audio output. Audio received by the microphone 509 is AZD converted in the audio IZF508. Audio is output from the speaker 510. Examples of the input device 511 include a remote controller having a plurality of keys for inputting characters, numerical values, various instructions, a keyboard, a mouse, a touch panel, and the like.
[0065] また、映像 IZF512は、ディスプレイ 513と接続される。映像 IZF512は、具体的に は、たとえば、ディスプレイ 513全体の制御をおこなうグラフィックコントローラと、即時 表示可能な画像情報を一時的に記録する VRAM (Video RAM)などのバッファメ モリと、グラフィックコントローラから出力される画像データに基づいて、ディスプレイ 5 13を表示制御する制御 ICなどによって構成される。 In addition, video IZF 512 is connected to display 513. Specifically, the video IZF512 includes, for example, a graphic controller that controls the entire display 513 and a buffer memory such as a VRAM (Video RAM) that temporarily records image information that can be displayed immediately. And a control IC for controlling the display 513 based on image data output from the graphic controller.
[0066] ディスプレイ 513には、アイコン、カーソル、メニュー、ウィンドウ、あるいは文字や画 像などの各種データが表示される。このディスプレイ 513は、たとえば、 CRT、 TFT 液晶ディスプレイ、プラズマディスプレイなどを採用することができる。  [0066] Display 513 displays an icon, a cursor, a menu, a window, or various data such as characters and images. As this display 513, for example, a CRT, a TFT liquid crystal display, a plasma display, or the like can be adopted.
[0067] また、通信 IZF514は、無線を介して通信ネットワークに接続され、通信機 411, 4 21と CPU501とのインターフェースとして機能する。通信 I/F514は、さらに、無線 を介してインターネットなどの通信網に接続され、この通信網と CPU501とのインター フェースとしても機能する。  In addition, the communication IZF 514 is connected to a communication network via radio, and functions as an interface between the communication devices 411 and 421 and the CPU 501. The communication I / F 514 is further connected to a communication network such as the Internet via wireless and functions as an interface between the communication network and the CPU 501.
[0068] 通信網には、 LAN, WAN,公衆回線網や携帯電話網などがある。具体的には、 通信 IZF514は、たとえば、 FMチューナー、 VICS (Vehicle Information and Communication System) Zビーコンレシーノ 、無線通信機器、およびその他の 通信機器によって構成され、 VICSセンターから配信される渋滞や交通規制などの 道路交通情報を取得する。なお、 VICSは登録商標である。  [0068] Communication networks include LANs, WANs, public line networks, mobile phone networks, and the like. Specifically, the communication IZF514 is composed of, for example, FM tuner, VICS (Vehicle Information and Communication System) Z beacon Resino, wireless communication equipment, and other communication equipment. Get road traffic information. VICS is a registered trademark.
[0069] なお、通信機 411, 421のハードウェア構成は、上述した路側機 430, 440のハー ドウエア構成のうち、少なくとも CPU501と、 ROM502と、 RAM503と、音声 IZF50 8と、スピーカ 510と、映像 I/F512と、ディスプレイ 513と、通信 I/F514と、を備免 るちのとする。  [0069] It should be noted that the hardware configuration of the communication devices 411 and 421 is at least the CPU 501, ROM 502, RAM 503, audio IZF 50 8, speaker 510, video among the hardware configurations of the roadside devices 430 and 440 described above. I / F512, display 513, and communication I / F514 shall be omitted.
[0070] また、実施の形態 1にかかる運転支援システム 100の機能的構成のうち、受信部 11 1, 121および送信部 114, 123は通信 IZF514によって、判断部 112、検出部 113 、判定部 122は ROM502などに記録されたプログラムを CPU501が実行することに よって、それぞれその機能を実現する。  [0070] In the functional configuration of the driving support system 100 according to the first embodiment, the reception units 111 and 121 and the transmission units 114 and 123 are determined by the communication IZF 514 by the determination unit 112, the detection unit 113, and the determination unit 122. Each function is realized by the CPU 501 executing a program recorded in the ROM 502 or the like.
[0071] (運転支援システム 400の運転支援処理)  [0071] (Driving support processing of driving support system 400)
つぎに、実施例 1にかかる運転支援システム 400の運転支援処理の詳細について 説明する。はじめに、本線側路側機 430がおこなう処理について説明する。図 6およ び図 7は、本線側路側機がおこなう運転支援処理の手順を示すフローチャートである  Next, details of the driving support processing of the driving support system 400 according to the first embodiment will be described. First, processing performed by the main line side roadside machine 430 will be described. 6 and 7 are flowcharts showing the procedure of the driving support process performed by the main line side roadside machine.
[0072] 図 6のフローチャートにおいて、本線側路側機 430は、自装置の通信エリア Aに車 両 410が進入したか否かを判断する (ステップ S601)。車両 410が進入した場合は( ステップ S601 : Yes)、進入した車両 410の通信機 411から、車両 410の ID、走行方 向、走行速度、位置情報を受信する (ステップ S602)。 [0072] In the flowchart of FIG. 6, the main roadside machine 430 is in the communication area A of its own device. It is determined whether or not both 410 have entered (step S601). When the vehicle 410 has entered (step S601: Yes), the ID, traveling direction, traveling speed, and position information of the vehicle 410 are received from the communication device 411 of the entering vehicle 410 (step S602).
[0073] 具体的には、車両 410に対して、これらの情報の送信要求をおこない、返信される 情報を受信する。また、位置情報は、 GPS電波受信機が搭載されている場合など、 車両 410に自車の現在位置を取得する機能が備わっている場合に送信を要求する 。一方、車両 410が通過しない場合は(ステップ S601 : No)、図 7のステップ S605に 移行する。 [0073] Specifically, the vehicle 410 is requested to transmit such information, and the returned information is received. The location information is requested to be transmitted when the vehicle 410 has a function of acquiring the current location of the vehicle, such as when a GPS radio wave receiver is installed. On the other hand, when the vehicle 410 does not pass (step S601: No), the process proceeds to step S605 in FIG.
[0074] つぎに、本線側路側機 430は、ステップ S602で取得した走行方向および走行速 度を元に車両 410が合流地点 Pに到達する合流時刻を算出する (ステップ S603)。 具体的には、車両 410が、そのまま道なりに走行すると合流地点 Pに到達する場合に 、現在の走行速度を維持すると仮定して合流地点 Pに到達する時刻を算出する。  Next, the main line side roadside machine 430 calculates a merging time at which the vehicle 410 reaches the merging point P based on the traveling direction and the traveling speed acquired in Step S602 (Step S603). Specifically, when the vehicle 410 travels as it is and reaches the junction P, the time to reach the junction P is calculated on the assumption that the current traveling speed is maintained.
[0075] なお、合流時刻の算出にあたって、車両 410と合流地点 Pとの距離は、ステップ S6 02で受信した車両 410の位置情報を用いて算出する。また、車両 410と合流地点 P との距離を、本線側路側機 430と合流地点 Pとの距離を近似して用いることとしてもよ い。この場合、車両 410が自車の現在位置情報を取得する機能を有さなくても、合流 時刻を算出することができる。また、合流時刻は、合流地点 Pに到達するまでに起こり うる速度変化を考慮に入れ、時刻ではなく所定の幅を有する時間帯として算出するこ ととしてもよ 、。  [0075] In the calculation of the merging time, the distance between the vehicle 410 and the merging point P is calculated using the position information of the vehicle 410 received in step S602. Alternatively, the distance between the vehicle 410 and the merge point P may be used by approximating the distance between the main roadside machine 430 and the merge point P. In this case, the merging time can be calculated even if the vehicle 410 does not have a function of acquiring the current position information of the own vehicle. Also, the merging time may be calculated as a time zone having a predetermined width instead of the time, taking into account the speed change that may occur before reaching the merging point P.
[0076] そして、本線側路側機 430は、受信した ID、走行方向、走行速度、位置情報や、算 出した合流時刻をデータベースとして保存し (ステップ S604)、図 7のステップ S605 に移行する。データベースに保存されたデータは、少なくとも合流時刻が経過するま では本線側路側機 430で保存し、それ以降は逐次消去する。  Then, the main line side roadside machine 430 stores the received ID, traveling direction, traveling speed, position information, and the calculated joining time as a database (step S604), and proceeds to step S605 in FIG. The data stored in the database is stored at the main roadside unit 430 at least until the merging time elapses, and is subsequently deleted sequentially.
[0077] 図 7の説明に移り、本線側路側機 430は、合流側路側機 440からデータベースの 照合要求があった力否かを判断する (ステップ S605)。ここで、データベースの照合 要求とは、合流車線 L2を走行する車両 420の合流時刻と同時刻に、合流地点 P〖こ 到達する車両 410が存在するかを、合流側路側機 440が照合要求するものである。 このとき合流側路側機 440から送信される照合要求には、車両 420の合流時刻が含 まれている。 [0077] Turning to the description of FIG. 7, the main roadside unit 430 determines whether or not there is a database collation request from the merging side roadside unit 440 (step S605). Here, the database collation request means that the merge side roadside device 440 collates whether there is a vehicle 410 that reaches the merge point P at the same time as the merge time of the vehicle 420 traveling on the merge lane L2. Is. At this time, the collation request transmitted from the merge side roadside machine 440 includes the merge time of the vehicle 420. It is rare.
[0078] 照合要求があった場合は(ステップ S605: Yes)、ステップ S604で保存したデータ ベースを照合して (ステップ S606)、車両 420と衝突可能性がある車両 410があるか 否かを判断する (ステップ S607)。衝突可能性がある車両 410がある場合は (ステツ プ S607 :Yes)、その車両 410を監視対象車両としてリストアップするとともに (ステツ プ S608)、合流側路側機 440に照合結果を送信する (ステップ S609)。  [0078] If there is a verification request (step S605: Yes), the database stored in step S604 is verified (step S606) to determine whether there is a vehicle 410 that may collide with the vehicle 420. (Step S607). If there is a vehicle 410 with a possibility of collision (Step S607: Yes), the vehicle 410 is listed as a monitored vehicle (Step S608), and the verification result is sent to the merging roadside unit 440 (Step S608). S609).
[0079] 一方、照合要求がない場合は(ステップ S605 :No)、ステップ S601に戻り、以降の 処理を繰り返す。また、衝突可能性がある車両 410がない場合は (ステップ S607 :N o)、照合結果を送信して (ステップ S610)、本フローチャートによる処理を終了する。  [0079] On the other hand, when there is no collation request (step S605: No), the process returns to step S601 and the subsequent processing is repeated. If there is no vehicle 410 with a possibility of collision (step S607: No), the collation result is transmitted (step S610), and the processing according to this flowchart is terminated.
[0080] ステップ S606にお 、て、本線側路側機 430は、たとえば、車両 420の合流時刻を 含む所定の時間帯 (たとえば、合流時刻の前後 15秒など)に合流時刻が含まれる車 両 410があるかを照合し、ある場合には、その車両を監視対象車両として、合流時刻 、走行速度、位置情報などを抽出する。そして、本線側路側機 430は、抽出した車両 410の合流時刻、走行速度、位置情報などを照合結果として送信する。このとき、監 視対象車両に対して、何らかの警告情報を送信してもよ ヽ。  [0080] In step S606, the main roadside unit 430 includes, for example, a vehicle 410 whose merging time is included in a predetermined time zone including the merging time of the vehicle 420 (for example, 15 seconds before and after the merging time). If there is, the merging time, traveling speed, position information, etc. are extracted with the vehicle as the monitoring target vehicle. Then, the main roadside machine 430 transmits the extracted joining time, traveling speed, position information, and the like of the vehicle 410 as a verification result. At this time, some warning information may be sent to the monitored vehicle.
[0081] 一方、車両 420の合流時刻を含む所定の時間帯に合流時刻が含まれる車両 410 がな 、場合は (ステップ S607: Noの場合)、該当する車両 410がな 、旨の情報を送 信する。また、このように該当する車両 410がない場合は、照合結果の送信を省略す ることをもって、該当する車両 410がない旨の情報の送信に代えてもよい。  [0081] On the other hand, if there is no vehicle 410 whose joining time is included in a predetermined time zone including the joining time of vehicle 420 (step S607: No), information indicating that there is no corresponding vehicle 410 is sent. I believe. Further, when there is no corresponding vehicle 410 as described above, transmission of information indicating that there is no corresponding vehicle 410 may be performed by omitting the transmission of the verification result.
[0082] ステップ S609で照合結果を送信した後、本線側路側機 430は、監視対象車両の 走行速度などを受信する (ステップ S611)。走行速度など、とは、ステップ S602で受 信した走行方向、走行速度、位置情報などの情報である。つぎに、ステップ S611で 受信した情報を用いて、再度監視対象車両の合流時刻を算出する (ステップ S612)  [0082] After transmitting the collation result in step S609, the main roadside unit 430 receives the traveling speed of the monitored vehicle, etc. (step S611). The travel speed and the like are information such as the travel direction, travel speed, and position information received in step S602. Next, using the information received in step S611, the merging time of the monitored vehicle is calculated again (step S612).
[0083] そして、算出した合流時刻とステップ S603で算出した合流時刻とを比較して、合流 時刻に変化があるカゝ否かを判断する (ステップ S613)。このように、合流時刻に変化 があったかを判断するのは、はじめに走行速度を受信した際と比較して、車両 410の 走行速度や走行方向などに変化があった場合には、衝突可能性がなくなつている場 合がある力 である。 [0083] Then, the calculated merging time is compared with the merging time calculated in step S603 to determine whether there is a change in the merging time (step S613). In this way, it is determined whether there is a change in the merging time when there is a change in the traveling speed or traveling direction of the vehicle 410 compared to when the traveling speed is first received. Losing place It is a force that has a match.
[0084] 合流時刻に変化があった場合は (ステップ S613: Yes)、合流側路側機 440に合流 時刻の変化を送信し (ステップ S614)、ステップ S615に移行する。一方、合流時刻 に変化がな 、場合は (ステップ S613: No)、合流地点 Pに到達した力否かを判断し( ステップ S615)、合流地点 Pに到達した場合は(ステップ S615 :Yes)、本フローチヤ ートによる処理を終了する。一方、合流地点 Pに到達しない場合は (ステップ S615 : No)、ステップ S611に戻り、以降の処理を継続し、監視対象車両の監視を継続する  If there is a change in the merging time (step S613: Yes), the merging time change is transmitted to the merging side roadside device 440 (step S614), and the process proceeds to step S615. On the other hand, if there is no change in the merging time (step S613: No), it is determined whether or not the force has reached the merging point P (step S615). If the merging point P is reached (step S615: Yes), The processing by this flow chart ends. On the other hand, if the merging point P is not reached (step S615: No), the process returns to step S611, and the subsequent processing is continued to monitor the monitored vehicle.
[0085] つぎに、合流側路側機 440側でおこなう処理にっ 、て説明する。図 8は、合流側路 側機がおこなう運転支援処理の手順を示すフローチャートである。図 8のフローチヤ ートにおいて、合流側路側機 440は、自装置の通信エリア Bに車両 420が進入する まで待機する(ステップ S801: Noのループ)。車両 420が進入した場合は(ステップ S801 : Yes)、進入した車両 420の通信機 421力ら、車両 420の ID、走行方向、走 行速度、位置情報を受信する (ステップ S802)。 Next, the processing performed on the merging side roadside machine 440 side will be described. FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing the procedure of driving support processing performed by the merging side roadside machine. In the flow chart of FIG. 8, the merging side roadside device 440 waits until the vehicle 420 enters the communication area B of its own device (step S801: No loop). When the vehicle 420 has entered (step S801: Yes), the ID, traveling direction, traveling speed, and position information of the vehicle 420 are received from the communication device 421 force of the entering vehicle 420 (step S802).
[0086] 具体的には、本線側路側機 430と同様に、車両 420に対してこれらの情報の送信 要求をおこない、返信される情報を受信する。また、位置情報は、 GPS電波受信機 が搭載されて ヽる場合など、車両 420に自車の現在位置を取得する機能が備わって いる場合に送信を要求する。  [0086] Specifically, as with the main line side roadside machine 430, the vehicle 420 is requested to transmit these pieces of information, and the returned information is received. The location information is requested to be transmitted when the vehicle 420 has a function of acquiring the current location of the vehicle, such as when a GPS radio wave receiver is installed.
[0087] つぎに、合流側路側機 440は、ステップ S802で取得した走行方向および走行速 度を元に車両 420が合流地点 Pに到達する合流時刻を算出する (ステップ S803)。 具体的には、車両 420が、そのまま道なりに走行すると合流地点 Pに到達する場合に 、現在の走行速度を維持すると仮定して合流地点 Pに到達する時刻を算出する。  Next, merging side roadside machine 440 calculates a merging time at which vehicle 420 reaches merging point P based on the traveling direction and traveling speed acquired in step S802 (step S803). Specifically, when the vehicle 420 reaches the merging point P when traveling on the road as it is, the time to reach the merging point P is calculated on the assumption that the current traveling speed is maintained.
[0088] なお、合流時刻の算出にあたって、車両 420と合流地点 Pとの距離は、ステップ S8 02で受信した車両 420の位置情報を用いて算出する。また、車両 420と合流地点 P との距離を、合流側路側機 440と合流地点 Pとの距離を近似して用いることとしてもよ い。この場合、車両 420が自車の現在位置情報を取得する機能を有さなくても、合流 時刻を算出することができる。また、合流時刻は、合流地点 Pに到達するまでに起こり うる速度変化を考慮に入れ、時刻ではなく所定の幅を有する時間帯として算出するこ ととしてもよ 、。 [0088] It should be noted that in calculating the merging time, the distance between the vehicle 420 and the merging point P is calculated using the position information of the vehicle 420 received in step S802. Further, the distance between the vehicle 420 and the merge point P may be approximated with the distance between the merge side roadside machine 440 and the merge point P. In this case, the merging time can be calculated even if the vehicle 420 does not have the function of acquiring the current position information of the host vehicle. Also, the merging time is calculated not as a time but as a time zone with a predetermined width, taking into account the speed change that can occur before reaching the merging point P. Or even ...
[0089] そして、合流側路側機 440は、本線側路側機 430に対して、ステップ S803で算出 した合流時刻を含んだ照合要求を送信する (ステップ S804)。照合要求とは、車両 4 20の合流時刻と同時刻に、合流地点 Pに到達する車両 410が存在するかを合流側 路側機 440が照合要求するものである。  Then, merging side roadside machine 440 transmits a verification request including the merging time calculated in step S803 to main line side roadside machine 430 (step S804). The verification request is a request for verification by the merging side roadside device 440 whether there is a vehicle 410 that reaches the merging point P at the same time as the merging time of the vehicle 420.
[0090] 合流側路側機 440は、本線側路側機 430から照合要求に対する返信があるまで待 機する (ステップ S805 :Noのループ)。本線側路側機 430から照合要求に対する返 信があると (ステップ S805 : Yes)、返信された照合結果を元にして、車両 420と車両 410とに衝突可能性があるか否かを判断する (ステップ S806)。  [0090] Junction side roadside machine 440 waits until a reply to the verification request is received from main line side roadside machine 430 (step S805: No loop). If there is a response to the verification request from main line side roadside machine 430 (step S805: Yes), it is determined whether there is a possibility of collision between vehicle 420 and vehicle 410 based on the returned verification result ( Step S806).
[0091] 衝突可能性があるかの判断は、返信された照合結果を元にしておこなう。たとえば 、受信した照合結果に、車両 410の合流時刻、走行速度、位置情報などが含まれる 場合は、衝突可能性ありと判断する。また、照合結果が該当する車両 410がない旨 の情報である場合は、衝突可能性なしと判断する。  The determination as to whether or not there is a possibility of collision is made based on the returned collation result. For example, if the received collation result includes the merging time, traveling speed, position information, etc. of the vehicle 410, it is determined that there is a possibility of collision. If the collation result is information indicating that there is no applicable vehicle 410, it is determined that there is no possibility of collision.
[0092] そして、衝突可能性がある場合は(ステップ S806: Yes)、車両 420の通信機 421 に警告情報を送信する (ステップ S807)。このとき、車両 420の通信機 421への情報 送信には、ステップ S802で受信した車両 420の IDを通信用アドレスとして用いる。  If there is a possibility of collision (step S806: Yes), warning information is transmitted to the communication device 421 of the vehicle 420 (step S807). At this time, for transmitting information to the communication device 421 of the vehicle 420, the ID of the vehicle 420 received in step S802 is used as a communication address.
[0093] また、警告情報とは、衝突可能性がある車両 410の存在を、車両 420の運転者に 警告する情報である。具体的には、衝突可能性がある車両 410の合流時刻や走行 速度、位置情報、衝突を回避するための具体的な措置などの情報である。車両 420 の通信機 421では、送信された警告情報を画面表示や音声出力することによって、 衝突可能性のある車両 410の存在を車両 420の運転者に報知する。車両 420の運 転者は、通信機 421から報知される情報を元に、車両 410との衝突を回避する措置( たとえば走行速度の低減、車線変更など)を講じる。  Further, the warning information is information that warns the driver of the vehicle 420 of the presence of the vehicle 410 that may collide. Specifically, it is information such as the merging time, traveling speed, position information, and specific measures for avoiding the collision of the vehicle 410 that may collide. The communicator 421 of the vehicle 420 notifies the driver of the vehicle 420 of the presence of the vehicle 410 that is likely to collide by displaying the transmitted warning information on a screen or by outputting sound. Based on the information notified from the communication device 421, the driver of the vehicle 420 takes measures to avoid a collision with the vehicle 410 (for example, reduction of travel speed, lane change, etc.).
[0094] 一方、衝突可能性がな 、場合は (ステップ S806: No)、警告情報の送信はおこな わず、本フローチャートによる処理を終了する。なお、このとき、衝突可能性がある車 両 410はな ヽ旨の情報を送信することとしてもよ!、。  On the other hand, if there is no possibility of collision (step S806: No), the warning information is not transmitted, and the processing according to this flowchart is terminated. At this time, the vehicle 410 with the possibility of collision may send information to the effect!
[0095] ステップ S807で警告情報を送信した後、合流側路側機 440は、本線側路側機 43 0から合流時刻の変化に関する情報を受信した力否かを判断する (ステップ S808)。 合流時刻の変化に関する情報とは、図 7のステップ S614において、本線側路側機 4 30が、監視対象車両の合流時刻に変化があった場合に送信する情報である。 [0095] After the warning information is transmitted in step S807, the merging side roadside device 440 determines whether or not it has received the information regarding the change in the merging time from the main line side roadside device 430 (step S808). The information related to the change in the merging time is information that the main roadside unit 430 transmits when there is a change in the merging time of the monitoring target vehicle in step S614 in FIG.
[0096] 合流時刻の変化に関する情報を受信した場合は (ステップ S808: Yes)、監視対象 車両との衝突が回避されたカゝ否かを判断する (ステップ S809)。衝突が回避されたか 否かの判断は、たとえば、新たに受信した監視対象車両の合流時刻と、車両 420の 合流時刻との差分が、所定時間以上の場合には、衝突可能性がなくなり衝突は回避 されたと判断し、所定時間未満の場合には、衝突可能性がなくならず衝突は回避さ れていないと判断する。  [0096] When the information on the change in the merging time is received (step S808: Yes), it is determined whether or not the collision with the monitored vehicle is avoided (step S809). For example, if the difference between the newly received merging time of the monitored vehicle and the merging time of the vehicle 420 is equal to or longer than the predetermined time, the possibility of collision is lost and the collision is determined. If it is determined that the collision has been avoided and the time is less than the predetermined time, it is determined that the collision is not avoided and the collision is not avoided.
[0097] 監視対象車両との衝突が回避された場合は (ステップ S809: Yes)、本フローチヤ ートによる処理を終了する。なお、このとき、車両 420の通信機 421に、衝突が回避さ れた旨の情報を送信することとしてもよい。  [0097] If a collision with the monitored vehicle is avoided (step S809: Yes), the process according to this flow chart is terminated. At this time, information indicating that the collision has been avoided may be transmitted to the communication device 421 of the vehicle 420.
[0098] 一方、合流時刻の変化に関する情報を受信しない場合 (ステップ S808 : No)、また は衝突が回避されない場合は (ステップ S809 : No)、車両 420が合流地点 Pに到達 したカゝ否かを判断する (ステップ S810)。合流地点 Pに到達したカゝ否かの判断は、た とえば、ステップ S803で算出した合流時刻が経過した力 または、車両 420に対して 継続的に位置情報の送信を要求し、返信される現在位置情報が合流地点 Pを通過 したか、などによって半 U断する。  [0098] On the other hand, if the information regarding the change of the merging time is not received (step S808: No), or if the collision is not avoided (step S809: No), whether the vehicle 420 has reached the merging point P or not. Is determined (step S810). For example, whether or not the vehicle has reached the merge point P is determined by, for example, the force at which the merge time calculated in step S803 has elapsed or the vehicle 420 is continuously requested to transmit position information and returned. The current position information is cut halfway depending on whether the current location information has passed merging point P.
[0099] 車両 420が合流地点 Pに到達した場合は (ステップ S810 : Yes)、衝突可能性につ いての警告情報を送信する必要はなくなるため、本フローチャートによる処理を終了 する。一方、車両 420が合流地点 Pに到達していない場合は (ステップ S810 :No)、 ステップ S807に戻り、車両 420に対して、衝突可能性についての警告情報を送信を 継続する。以上が運転支援システム 400の運転支援処理の手順である。  [0099] When the vehicle 420 has arrived at the junction P (step S810: Yes), it is not necessary to transmit warning information about the possibility of collision, so the processing according to this flowchart is terminated. On the other hand, when the vehicle 420 has not reached the junction P (step S810: No), the process returns to step S807, and continues to transmit warning information about the possibility of collision to the vehicle 420. The above is the procedure of the driving support process of the driving support system 400.
[0100] なお、実施例 1では、本線側路側機 430のみが本線 L1を走行する車両 410の合流 時刻の変化を検出することとしたが、合流側路側機 440においても、合流車線 L2を 走行する車両 420の合流時刻の変化を検出し、本線側路側機 430にフィードバック することとしてもよい。これにより、本線側路側機 430においても、より正確な情報を合 流側路側機 440に提供することができる。  [0100] In Example 1, only the main roadside machine 430 detects a change in the merging time of the vehicle 410 traveling on the main line L1, but the merging side roadside machine 440 also travels on the merging lane L2. It is also possible to detect a change in the merging time of the vehicle 420 and feed it back to the main roadside unit 430. As a result, the main line side roadside machine 430 can provide more accurate information to the merging side roadside machine 440.
[0101] また、本線側路側機 430にお ヽて、衝突可能性がある車両 410 (監視対象車両)の 後続車の合流時刻についても、合流側路側機 440に送信することとしてもよい。これ により、合流側路側機 440では、後続車も含めて衝突を回避するための措置を車両 420の運転者に提案することができる。 [0101] In addition, there is a possibility of collision of vehicles 410 (supervised vehicles) with the possibility of collision with the main roadside roadside machine 430. The merging time of the following vehicle may also be transmitted to the merging side roadside device 440. As a result, the merging side roadside machine 440 can propose measures for avoiding a collision including the following vehicle to the driver of the vehicle 420.
[0102] さらに、衝突回避のための動作 (以下、衝突回避動作という)は、運転者の運転によ らず、車両 410, 420に設けられた運転補助装置や自動運転装置(図示せず)によつ て、自動的におこなうこととしてもよい。その際、衝突可能性がある他の車両 410, 42 0に対して、衝突可能性についての報知情報などを送信すると同時に、減速や車線 変更などの衝突回避動作の種類にっ 、ての情報 (以下、回避動作情報と 、う)を送 信することとしてもよい。回避動作情報の送信は、ブレーキ操作やハンドル操作に応 じて自動でおこなわれることとしてちよ!、。  [0102] Further, the collision avoidance operation (hereinafter referred to as the collision avoidance operation) is not dependent on the driver's operation, and the driving assistance device or the automatic driving device (not shown) provided in the vehicles 410 and 420. This can be done automatically. At that time, information on the possibility of collision is transmitted to other vehicles 410, 420 having a possibility of collision, and at the same time, information on the type of collision avoidance operation such as deceleration or lane change ( Hereinafter, the avoidance operation information may be transmitted. The avoidance movement information is automatically transmitted according to the brake operation and steering wheel operation! ,.
[0103] 他の車両 410, 420に送信された回避動作情報は、その内容が他の車両 410, 42 0に搭載された通信機 411, 421〖こ表示される。運転者による運転によって他の車両 410, 420の回避動作をおこなう場合、他の車両 410, 420の運転者は、相手側が 回避動作に入ったことを認識し、自身は回避動作をおこなわず、そのまま走行しようと 半 U断することができる。  [0103] The avoidance operation information transmitted to the other vehicles 410 and 420 is displayed with the contents of the communication devices 411 and 421 mounted on the other vehicles 410 and 420. When avoiding other vehicles 410 and 420 by driving by the driver, the driver of the other vehicles 410 and 420 recognizes that the other side has entered the avoiding operation, and does not perform the avoiding operation as it is. You can make a semi-U-stop to drive.
[0104] また、運転補助装置または自動運転装置によって回避動作をおこなう場合は、相 手側から回避動作情報を受信後、相手側に対して回避動作をおこなうことに対する 許可を取って力 回避動作をおこなう。この場合、これらの情報の送受信、回避動作 をおこなうかの判断および回避動作の実行は、運転補助装置または自動運転装置 によって自動でおこなわれる。  [0104] When the avoidance operation is performed by the driving assistance device or the automatic operation device, after receiving the avoidance operation information from the other side, permission to perform the avoidance operation on the other side is obtained and the force avoidance operation is performed. Do it. In this case, transmission / reception of such information, determination of whether to perform the avoidance operation, and execution of the avoidance operation are automatically performed by the driving assistance device or the automatic driving device.
[0105] さらに、衝突回避動作は、原則的に本線 L1を走行する車両 410がおこなうというル ールを設けて、合流車線 L2を走行する車両 420から、車両 410に対して衝突回避 動作を促す通知を送るようにしてもよい。逆に、本線 L1を走行する車両 410から、車 両 420に対して衝突回避動作を促す通知を送るようにしてもよい。この場合、たとえ ば、車両 410, 420に、後方や側方の通行状態を自動的に認識できる機能が設けら れている場合、通知を受信した側の車線が衝突回避動作を起しにくいときは、回避 不可である信号を返し、通知を送信した側の車両 410, 420が衝突回避動作をおこ なう。 [0106] このような通知は、たとえば、運転者による運転によって車両 410, 420の回避動作 をおこなう場合であれば、「〇〇kmZhに減速してください」、「右側の車線に車線変 更してくださ!/、」のような具体的な回避動作を含んだ回避動作情報を送信する。また 、運転補助装置または自動運転装置によって回避動作をおこなう場合であれば、こ れらの装置を制御する信号を、車両 410, 420に送信する。 [0105] Furthermore, in principle, a rule that the vehicle 410 traveling on the main line L1 performs the collision avoidance operation is promoted to the vehicle 410 from the vehicle 420 traveling on the confluence lane L2. A notification may be sent. Conversely, the vehicle 410 traveling on the main line L1 may send a notification that prompts the vehicle 420 to perform a collision avoidance operation. In this case, for example, if the vehicle 410, 420 is provided with a function that can automatically recognize the rear and side traffic conditions, the lane on the side that received the notification is unlikely to cause collision avoidance. Returns a signal that the vehicle cannot avoid, and the vehicles 410 and 420 on the side that sent the notification perform the collision avoidance operation. [0106] For example, if the driver avoids the vehicle 410, 420 by driving by the driver, "Decelerate to 〇kmZh" or "Change lane to the right lane." Please send avoidance action information including a specific avoidance action such as "/!". Further, if the avoidance operation is performed by the driving assistance device or the automatic driving device, a signal for controlling these devices is transmitted to the vehicles 410 and 420.
[0107] さらに、図 8のステップ S806の衝突可能性がある力否かを判断は、本線側路側機 4 30でおこなうこととしてもよい。この場合、本線側路側機 430は、ステップ S804で送 信される照合要求に含まれる車両 420の合流時刻および車両 410の合流時刻のデ ータベースに基づいて、衝突可能性を判断する。そして、データベースの照合結果 の代わりに、判断結果を第 2の通信装置 120に送信する。また、この場合、図 7のステ ップ S613で合流時刻に変化があった場合は、再度衝突可能性がある力否かの判断 をおこな 、、判断結果を合流側路側機 440に送信することとしてもょ 、。  [0107] Further, whether or not there is a possibility of collision in step S806 in FIG. 8 may be determined by the main roadside unit 430. In this case, the main line side roadside machine 430 determines the possibility of collision based on the database of the merge time of the vehicle 420 and the merge time of the vehicle 410 included in the verification request transmitted in step S804. Then, the determination result is transmitted to the second communication device 120 instead of the database collation result. Also, in this case, if there is a change in the merging time in step S613 of FIG. 7, it is determined again whether there is a possibility of collision, and the determination result is transmitted to the merging side roadside device 440. As a matter of fact.
[0108] 以上説明したように、実施例 1にかかる運転支援システム 400によれば、本線側路 側機 430および合流側路側機 440によって、衝突可能性がある車両 410, 420を特 定し、合流地点 Pまで継続的に監視することができる。これにより、車両 410, 420の 運転者は、衝突可能性がある他の車両 410, 420の動きを考慮しつつ、減速や車線 変更などの衝突回避のための処理をおこなうことができる。  [0108] As described above, according to the driving support system 400 according to the first embodiment, the main road side machine 430 and the merging side road machine 440 identify the vehicles 410 and 420 that may collide, Monitoring can be continued up to the meeting point P. As a result, the driver of the vehicles 410 and 420 can perform a collision avoidance process such as deceleration or lane change while taking into consideration the movement of the other vehicles 410 and 420 that may possibly collide.
[0109] (実施例 2)  [Example 2]
実施の形態 1の実施例 1にかかる運転支援システム 400では、本線 L1および合流 車線 L2にそれぞれ 1台ずつ設置された路側機 430, 440〖こよって車両 410, 420の 運転支援をおこなった。実施の形態 1の実施例 2にかかる運転支援システム 900で は、本線 L1および合流車線 L2にそれぞれ複数台ずつ設置された路側機 930, 940 によって車両 410, 420の運転支援をおこなう。このように、複数台の路側機 930, 9 40を設けることによって、現実の交通状況をより反映させた運転支援をおこなうことが できる。  In the driving support system 400 according to the first embodiment of the first embodiment, driving support for the vehicles 410 and 420 is provided by the roadside machines 430 and 440 installed on the main line L1 and the merging lane L2, respectively. In the driving support system 900 according to the second embodiment of the first embodiment, driving support for the vehicles 410 and 420 is performed by the roadside machines 930 and 940 installed on the main line L1 and the merging lane L2, respectively. As described above, by providing a plurality of roadside machines 930 and 940, it is possible to provide driving support that more reflects actual traffic conditions.
[0110] まず、実施例 2にかかる運転支援システム 900が適用される交通状況について説 明する。図 9は、実施例 2にかかる運転支援システムが適用される交通状況を示す説 明図である。図 9において、図 4に示した実施例 1と同様に、合流地点の一例として、 高速道路の本線 LIと合流車線 L2とが交差する合流地点 Pが図示されている。合流 地点 Pの周辺には、移動体の一例として車両 410 (410a〜410c) , 420 (420a, 42 Ob)が走行している。車両 410は本線 L1を走行する車両、車両 420は合流車線 L2 を走行する車両である。 [0110] First, the traffic situation to which the driving support system 900 according to the second embodiment is applied will be described. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram illustrating traffic conditions to which the driving support system according to the second embodiment is applied. In FIG. 9, as in Example 1 shown in FIG. The merge point P where the main road LI and the merge lane L2 intersect is shown. Vehicles 410 (410a to 410c) and 420 (420a, 42 Ob) are traveling around the junction P as an example of a moving body. The vehicle 410 is a vehicle traveling on the main line L1, and the vehicle 420 is a vehicle traveling on the merging lane L2.
[0111] 車両 410, 420に ίま、それぞれ通信機 411 (411 a〜411c) , 421 (421a, 421b) が搭載されている。通信機 411, 421は、車両 410, 420がそれぞれ走行する道路 脇に設置された路側機 930, 940と交信し、自車の走行情報を送信したり、運転支援 情報を受信したりする。 [0111] Communication devices 411 (411a to 411c) and 421 (421a and 421b) are mounted on vehicles 410 and 420, respectively. The communication devices 411 and 421 communicate with roadside devices 930 and 940 installed on the side of the road on which the vehicles 410 and 420 travel, respectively, and transmit their own vehicle travel information and receive driving support information.
[0112] また、車両 410, 420は、それぞれ自車を特定する IDが、たとえば、 IPアドレスのよ うに、それぞれの車両 410, 420に一意に割り振られている。この IDは、運転支援シ ステム 900にお!/ヽて通信用アドレスに用!ヽられ、通信機 411, 421ίま、車両 410, 42 0の IDを用いて特定の車両 410, 420に情報を送信することができる。それぞれの車 両 410, 420の IDは、それぞれの通信機 411, 421に記 '慮されている。  [0112] In addition, each vehicle 410, 420 has an ID for identifying its own vehicle, for example, an IP address uniquely assigned to each vehicle 410, 420. This ID is assigned to the driver assistance system 900 and used as a communication address, and information is sent to the specific vehicle 410, 420 using the ID of the communication device 411, 421ί or the vehicle 410, 420. Can be sent. The ID of each vehicle 410, 420 is stored in each communication device 411, 421.
[0113] 路側機 930 (930a〜930n)は、本線 L1の近傍に設置されており、本線 L1を走行 し、路側機 930の側を通過する車両 410の通信機 411と交信する。また、路側機 94 0 (940a〜940m)は、合流車線 L2の近傍に設置されており、合流車線 L2を走行し 、路側機 940の側を通過する車両 420の通信機 421と交信する。以下、路側機 930 を本線側路側機 930、路側機 940を合流側路側機 940と ヽぅ。  [0113] The roadside machine 930 (930a to 930n) is installed in the vicinity of the main line L1, travels on the main line L1, and communicates with the communication device 411 of the vehicle 410 that passes the roadside machine 930 side. The roadside machine 940 (940a to 940m) is installed in the vicinity of the merging lane L2, travels on the merging lane L2, and communicates with the communicator 421 of the vehicle 420 that passes the roadside machine 940 side. In the following, the roadside machine 930 is referred to as the main line side roadside machine 930, and the roadside machine 940 is referred to as the merge side roadside machine 940.
[0114] 本線側路側機 930 (930a〜930n)は、本線 L1の近傍に合流地点 Pの手前力も適 当な間隔をあけて設置されている。本線側路側機 930のうち、合流地点 Pから最も遠 V、ものを本線側路側機 930a、合流地点 Pに最も近!ヽものを本線側路側機 930ηとす る。また、合流側路側機 940 (940a〜940m)は、合流車線 L2の近傍に合流地点 P の手前力も適当な間隔をあけて設置されている。合流側路側機 940のうち、合流地 点 Pから最も遠!ヽものを合流側路側機 940a、合流地点 Pに最も近!ヽものを合流側路 側機 940mとする。  [0114] The main roadside unit 930 (930a to 930n) is installed in the vicinity of the main line L1 with an appropriate distance between the front points of the junction P. Of the main roadside unit 930, the farthest V from the junction P is the main roadside unit 930a, and the one closest to the junction P is the main roadside machine 930η. Further, the merging side roadside machine 940 (940a to 940m) is installed in the vicinity of the merging lane L2 with a front force at the merging point P with an appropriate interval. Of the merging side roadside machine 940, the one that is farthest from the merging point P is the merging side roadside machine 940a, and the one that is closest to the merging point P is the merging side roadside machine 940m.
[0115] また、本線側路側機 930、合流側路側機 940は、たとえば、 DSRC (Dedicated S hort Range Communication)のような狭域通信用の路側機であり、その通信ェ リアは、通信機 411, 421と交信した時点における車両 410, 420の位置を、自装置 の位置と近似できる程に狭小なものとする。 [0115] Further, the main line side roadside machine 930 and the merging side roadside machine 940 are roadside machines for narrow area communication such as DSRC (Dedicated Short Range Communication), for example. , 421 The position of the vehicle 410, 420 at the time of communication with 421 It should be narrow enough to approximate the position of.
[0116] また、本線側路側機 930、合流側路側機 940は、ネットワークを通じた通信によって 相互に情報の送受信が可能である。以下、本線側路側機 930、合流側路側機 940 はが車両 410, 420とおこなう通信を「狭域通信」、本線側路側機 930および合流側 路側機 940間でおこなう通信を「広域通信」という。  [0116] In addition, the main line side roadside machine 930 and the merge side roadside machine 940 can transmit and receive information to and from each other by communication through a network. Hereinafter, communication between the main line side machine 930 and the merge side road machine 940 with the vehicles 410 and 420 is referred to as “narrow area communication”, and communication between the main line road machine 930 and the merge side road machine 940 is referred to as “wide area communication”. .
[0117] 本線側路側機 930、合流側路側機 940は、それぞれの広域通信用アドレスをあら 力じめ保持している。一方で、本線側路側機 930、合流側路側機 940は、車両 910, 920の狭域通信用アドレスは保持しておらず、車両 910, 920が自装置の近傍を通 過した際にアドレス (ID)の取得要求をおこなうことによって、その通信用アドレスを得 る。  [0117] The main line side roadside machine 930 and the merge side roadside machine 940 preliminarily hold their respective wide area communication addresses. On the other hand, the main line side roadside machine 930 and the merge side roadside machine 940 do not hold the address for narrow-area communication of the vehicles 910 and 920, and when the vehicles 910 and 920 pass in the vicinity of their own devices ( Obtain the communication address by making an ID) acquisition request.
[0118] つぎに、実施例 2にかかる運転支援システム 900の運転支援処理の詳細について 説明する。なお、路側機 930, 940のハードウェア構成は、実施例 1にかかる路側機 330, 340と同様であるため、説明を省略する。はじめに、合流地点 Pから最も遠い本 線側路側機 930aがおこなう処理について説明する。なお、説明の便宜上、合流地 点 Pから最も遠 、本線側路側機 930aと、その他の本線側路側機 930b〜930nとの 処理を分けて説明するが、各本線側路側機 930a〜930nにおいて、どちらの処理を おこなってもよ ヽ。  Next, the details of the driving support processing of the driving support system 900 according to the second embodiment will be described. The hardware configuration of the roadside machines 930 and 940 is the same as that of the roadside machines 330 and 340 according to the first embodiment, and thus the description thereof is omitted. First, the processing performed by the main roadside unit 930a farthest from the junction P will be described. For convenience of explanation, the processing of the main line side roadside machine 930a farthest from the junction point P and the other main line side roadside machines 930b to 930n will be described separately, but in each main line side roadside machine 930a to 930n, Either process can be performed.
[0119] 図 10は、合流地点から最も遠い本線側路側機がおこなう運転支援処理の手順を 示すフローチャートである。図 10のフローチャートにおいて、本線側路側機 930aは、 自装置の近傍を車両 410が通過したか否かを判断する(ステップ S1001)。車両 410 が通過した場合は(ステップ S1001 : Yes)、通過した車両 410の通信機 411から、車 両 410の ID、走行方向、走行速度、位置情報を受信する (ステップ S1002)。  FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the driving support process performed by the main roadside machine farthest from the junction. In the flowchart of FIG. 10, the main line side roadside machine 930a determines whether or not the vehicle 410 has passed in the vicinity of the own apparatus (step S1001). If the vehicle 410 has passed (step S1001: Yes), the vehicle 410 ID, travel direction, travel speed, and position information are received from the communication device 411 of the passed vehicle 410 (step S1002).
[0120] 具体的には、車両 410に対して、これらの情報の送信要求をおこない、返信される 情報を受信する。また、位置情報は、 GPS電波受信機が搭載されている場合など、 車両 410に自車の現在位置を取得する機能が備わっている場合に送信を要求する 。一方、車両 410が通過しない場合は(ステップ S1001 :No)、ステップ S1005に移 行する。  [0120] Specifically, the vehicle 410 is requested to transmit these pieces of information, and the returned information is received. The location information is requested to be transmitted when the vehicle 410 has a function of acquiring the current location of the vehicle, such as when a GPS radio wave receiver is installed. On the other hand, when the vehicle 410 does not pass (step S1001: No), the process proceeds to step S1005.
[0121] つぎに、本線側路側機 930aは、ステップ S1002で受信した走行方向および走行 速度を元に車両 410が合流地点 Pに到達する合流時刻を算出する (ステップ S1003 )。具体的には、車両 410が、そのまま道なりに走行すると合流地点 Pに到達する場 合に、現在の走行速度を維持すると仮定して合流地点 Pに到達する時刻を算出する [0121] Next, the main line side roadside machine 930a receives the traveling direction and traveling received in step S1002. Based on the speed, a joining time at which the vehicle 410 reaches the joining point P is calculated (step S1003). Specifically, when the vehicle 410 reaches the confluence P when traveling on the road as it is, the time to reach the confluence P is calculated on the assumption that the current traveling speed is maintained.
[0122] なお、合流時刻の算出にあたって、車両 410と合流地点 Pとの距離は、本線側路側 機 930aと合流地点 Pとの距離を近似して用いる。この場合、車両 410が自車の現在 位置情報を取得する機能を有さなくても、合流時刻を算出することができる。また、ス テツプ S1002で車両 410の位置情報を受信できる場合には、受信した位置情報を 用いてもよい。また、合流時刻は、合流地点 Pに到達するまでに起こりうる速度変化を 考慮に入れ、時刻ではなく所定の幅を有する時間帯として算出することとしてもよい。 [0122] In calculating the merge time, the distance between the vehicle 410 and the merge point P approximates the distance between the main line side roadside machine 930a and the merge point P. In this case, the merging time can be calculated without the vehicle 410 having the function of acquiring the current position information of the host vehicle. Further, when the position information of the vehicle 410 can be received at step S1002, the received position information may be used. Also, the merging time may be calculated as a time zone having a predetermined width instead of the time, taking into account the speed change that may occur before reaching the merging point P.
[0123] そして、本線側路側機 930aは、受信した ID、走行方向、走行速度、位置情報や、 算出した合流時刻をデータベースとして保存する (ステップ S1004)。データベース に保存されたデータは、少なくとも合流時刻が経過するまでは本線側路側機 930aで 保存し、それ以降は逐次消去する。  Then, the main roadside unit 930a stores the received ID, traveling direction, traveling speed, position information, and the calculated joining time as a database (step S1004). The data stored in the database is stored at the main roadside unit 930a until at least the merge time elapses, and thereafter it is deleted sequentially.
[0124] つぎに、本線側路側機 930aは、合流側路側機 940からデータベースの照合要求 があったかを判断する(ステップ S1005)。ここで、データベースの照合要求とは、合 流車線 L2を走行する車両 420の合流時刻と同時刻に、合流地点 Pに到達する車両 410が存在する力否かを、合流側路側機 940が照合要求するものである。このとき合 流側路側機 940から送信される照合要求には、車両 420の合流時刻が含まれて 、る  Next, the main line side roadside machine 930a determines whether or not there is a database collation request from the merging side roadside machine 940 (step S1005). Here, the collation request of the database means that the merging side roadside device 940 collates whether or not there is a force of the vehicle 410 arriving at the merge point P at the same time as the merge time of the vehicle 420 traveling on the merge lane L2. It is what is requested. At this time, the verification request transmitted from the merging roadside machine 940 includes the merging time of the vehicle 420.
[0125] 照合要求があった場合は(ステップ S 1005: Yes)、ステップ S 1004で保存したデー タベースを照合して (ステップ S 1006)、車両 420と衝突可能性がある車両 410があ る力否かを判断する(ステップ S 1007)。 [0125] If there is a verification request (step S 1005: Yes), the database stored in step S 1004 is verified (step S 1006), and there is a force with the vehicle 410 that may collide with the vehicle 420. It is determined whether or not (step S1007).
[0126] 衝突可能性がある車両 410がある場合は(ステップ S1007 : Yes)、その車両 410を 監視対象車両としてリストアップするとともに (ステップ S1008)、合流側路側機 940に 照合結果を送信する (ステップ S1009)。そして、監視対象車両に関する情報を他の 本線側路側機 930b〜930nに送信して (ステップ S1010)、本フローチャートによる 処理を終了する。監視対象車両に関する情報とは、たとえば、監視対象車両の IDお よび合流時間、走行速度などの情報である。このとき、監視対象車両に対して、何ら かの警告情報を送信してもよ 、。 [0126] If there is a vehicle 410 with a possibility of collision (step S1007: Yes), the vehicle 410 is listed as a monitored vehicle (step S1008), and the verification result is transmitted to the merging side roadside device 940 ( Step S1009). Then, information related to the monitoring target vehicle is transmitted to the other main line side roadside devices 930b to 930n (step S1010), and the processing according to this flowchart ends. The information about the monitored vehicle is, for example, the ID of the monitored vehicle. And information such as merging time and traveling speed. At this time, some warning information may be sent to the monitored vehicle.
[0127] 一方、照合要求がない場合は(ステップ S1005 :No)、ステップ S1001に戻り、以 降の処理を繰り返す。また、衝突可能性がある車両 410がない場合は (ステップ S10 07 :No)、合流側路側機 940に照合結果を送信して (ステップ S1011)、本フローチ ヤートによる処理を終了する。  On the other hand, if there is no collation request (step S1005: No), the process returns to step S1001, and the subsequent processing is repeated. If there is no vehicle 410 with a possibility of collision (step S10 07: No), the collation result is transmitted to the merging side roadside device 940 (step S1011), and the processing by this flow chart is terminated.
[0128] ステップ S1007において、本線側路側機 930は、たとえば、車両 420の合流時刻 を含む所定の時間帯 (たとえば、合流時刻の前後 15秒など)に合流時刻が含まれる 車両 410があるかを照合し、ある場合には、その合流時刻、走行速度、位置情報など を抽出する。そして、本線側路側機 930は、抽出した車両 410の合流時刻、走行速 度、位置情報などを照合結果として送信する。  [0128] In step S1007, the main roadside unit 930 determines whether there is a vehicle 410 whose merging time is included in a predetermined time zone (for example, 15 seconds before and after the merging time) including the merging time of the vehicle 420, for example. Collate, and if there is, extract the merge time, travel speed, position information, etc. Then, the main roadside unit 930 transmits the extracted joining time, traveling speed, position information, and the like of the vehicle 410 as a verification result.
[0129] 一方、車両 420の合流時刻を含む所定の時間帯に合流時刻が含まれる車両 410 がな 、場合は (ステップ S 1007: Noの場合)、該当する車両 410がな ヽ旨の情報を 送信する。また、このように該当する車両 410がない場合は、照合結果の送信を省略 することをもって、該当する車両 410がない旨の情報の送信に代えてもよい。  [0129] On the other hand, if there is no vehicle 410 that includes the merging time in a predetermined time zone including the merging time of vehicle 420 (step S1007: No), information indicating that the corresponding vehicle 410 is not present is displayed. Send. Further, when there is no corresponding vehicle 410 as described above, transmission of information indicating that there is no corresponding vehicle 410 may be substituted by omitting the transmission of the verification result.
[0130] つぎに、本線側路側機 930a以外の他の本線側路側機 930b〜930nがおこなう処 理について説明する。図 11は、他の本線側路側機がおこなう運転支援処理の手順 を示すフローチャートである。なお、他の本線側路側機 930b〜930nは、図 10のス テツプ S1010で本線側路側機 930aが送信した、監視対象車両に関する情報を、あ らカじめ受信して 、るものとする。  [0130] Next, processing performed by the main line side roadside machines 930b to 930n other than the main line side roadside machine 930a will be described. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the procedure of driving support processing performed by another main roadside device. Note that the other main roadside units 930b to 930n receive the information on the monitored vehicle transmitted from the mainline side roadside unit 930a in step S1010 in FIG. 10 in advance.
[0131] 図 11のフローチャートにおいて、他の本線側路側機 930b〜930n、自装置の近傍 を車両 410が通過するまで待機する(ステップ S1101 :Noのループ)。車両 410が通 過した場合は(ステップ S 1101: Yes)、車両 410から IDを受信し (ステップ SI 102)、 監視対象車両か否かを判断する (ステップ S1103)。具体的には、本線側路側機 93 0aから受信した、監視対象車両に関する情報に含まれる IDと、ステップ S1102で受 信した IDとを照合することによって、監視対象車両か否かを判断する。  [0131] In the flowchart of FIG. 11, the process waits until the vehicle 410 passes through the other main roadside machines 930b to 930n and the vicinity of the own apparatus (step S1101: No loop). When the vehicle 410 passes (step S1101: Yes), the ID is received from the vehicle 410 (step SI102), and it is determined whether or not the vehicle is a monitoring target vehicle (step S1103). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the vehicle is a monitoring target vehicle by comparing the ID included in the information related to the monitoring target vehicle received from the main line side roadside machine 930a with the ID received in step S1102.
[0132] 監視対象車両の場合は (ステップ S1103 : Yes)、車両 410の走行方向、走行速度 、位置情報などを受信する (ステップ S 1104)。そして、受信した情報力も車両 410の 合流時刻を算出し (ステップ SI 105)、監視対象車両の IDおよび算出した合流時刻 力も構成される合流時刻情報を合流側路側機 940に送信して (ステップ S1106)、本 フローチャートによる処理を終了する。 [0132] In the case of a monitored vehicle (step S1103: Yes), the traveling direction, traveling speed, position information, etc. of the vehicle 410 are received (step S1104). And the received information power is The merging time is calculated (step SI 105), the merging time information that also includes the ID of the monitored vehicle and the calculated merging time force is transmitted to the merging side roadside device 940 (step S1106), and the processing according to this flowchart is terminated. .
[0133] なお、合流側路側機 940は合流車線 L2に複数設置されて 、るが、合流時刻を送 信するのは、すべての合流側路側機 940でもよいし、いずれか 1つの合流側路側機 940であってもよい。いずれ力 1つの合流側路側機 940に送信された場合、合流時 刻を受信した合流側路側機 940は、他の合流側路側機 940に対して合流時刻を送 信する。一方、監視対象車両ではない場合は (ステップ S 1103 : No)、ステップ S 110 1に戻り、以降の処理を繰り返す。以上が本線側路側機 930がおこなう処理である。 [0133] It should be noted that a plurality of merge side roadside machines 940 are installed in the merge lane L2, but the merge time may be transmitted to all the merge side roadside machines 940 or any one of the merge side roadsides. Machine 940 may be used. When the power is transmitted to one merging side roadside device 940, the merging side roadside device 940 that has received the merging time transmits the merging time to the other merging side roadside device 940. On the other hand, if the vehicle is not a monitoring target vehicle (step S 1103: No), the process returns to step S 110 1 and the subsequent processing is repeated. The above is the processing performed by the main line side roadside machine 930.
[0134] つぎに、合流側路側機 940がおこなう運転支援処理について説明する。まず、合 流地点 Pから最も遠 、合流側路側機 940aがおこなう処理にっ 、て説明する。なお、 説明の便宜上、合流地点 Pから最も遠い合流側路側機 940aと、その他の合流側路 側機 940b〜940mとの処理を分けて説明する力 各合流側路側機 940a〜940m において、どちらの処理をおこなってもよい。  [0134] Next, the driving support process performed by the merging side roadside machine 940 will be described. First, the processing performed by the junction side roadside device 940a farthest from the junction point P will be described. For convenience of explanation, the power to explain the processing of the merging side roadside machine 940a farthest from the merging point P and the other merging side roadside machines 940b to 940m in which of the merging side roadside machines 940a to 940m Processing may be performed.
[0135] 図 12は、合流地点から最も遠い合流側路側機がおこなう運転支援処理の手順を 示すフローチャートである。図 12のフローチャートにおいて、合流地点 Pから最も遠 V、合流側路側機 940aは、自装置の近傍を車両 420が通過するまで待機する (ステツ プ S 1201 : Noのループ)。車両 420が通過した場合は(ステップ S 1201 : Yes)、通 過した車両 420の通信機 421から、車両 420の ID、走行方向、走行速度、位置情報 を受信する (ステップ S 1202)。  [0135] FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the driving support process performed by the merging side roadside machine farthest from the merging point. In the flowchart of FIG. 12, V that is farthest from the merge point P and the merge-side roadside device 940a waits until the vehicle 420 passes in the vicinity of the own device (step S1201: No loop). When the vehicle 420 has passed (step S 1201: Yes), the ID, traveling direction, traveling speed, and position information of the vehicle 420 are received from the communication device 421 of the passed vehicle 420 (step S 1202).
[0136] 具体的には、本線側路側機 930と同様に、車両 420に対してこれらの情報の送信 要求をおこない、返信される情報を受信する。また、位置情報は、 GPS電波受信機 が搭載されて ヽる場合など、車両 420に自車の現在位置を取得する機能が備わって いる場合に送信を要求する。  [0136] Specifically, as with the main line side roadside machine 930, the vehicle 420 is requested to transmit these pieces of information, and the returned information is received. The location information is requested to be transmitted when the vehicle 420 has a function of acquiring the current location of the vehicle, such as when a GPS radio wave receiver is installed.
[0137] つぎに、合流側路側機 940aは、ステップ S1202で取得した走行方向および走行 速度を元に車両 420が合流地点 Pに到達する合流時刻を算出する (ステップ S1203 )。具体的には、車両 420が、そのまま道なりに走行すると合流地点 Pに到達する場 合に、現在の走行速度を維持すると仮定して合流地点 Pに到達する時刻を算出する [0138] なお、合流時刻の算出にあたって、車両 420と合流地点 Pとの距離は、合流側路側 機 940と合流地点 Pとの距離を近似して用いる。この場合、車両 420が自車の現在 位置情報を取得する機能を有さなくても、合流時刻を算出することができる。また、ス テツプ S802で車両 420の位置情報を受信した場合は、受信した情報を用いて算出 することとしてもよい。また、合流時刻は、合流地点 Pに到達するまでに起こりうる速度 変化を考慮に入れ、時刻ではなく所定の幅を有する時間帯として算出することとして ちょい。 Next, merging side roadside machine 940a calculates a merging time at which vehicle 420 reaches merging point P based on the traveling direction and the traveling speed acquired in step S1202 (step S1203). Specifically, when the vehicle 420 reaches the confluence P when traveling on the road as it is, the time to reach the confluence P is calculated on the assumption that the current traveling speed is maintained. [0138] In calculating the merging time, the distance between the vehicle 420 and the merging point P is used by approximating the distance between the merging side roadside device 940 and the merging point P. In this case, the merging time can be calculated without the vehicle 420 having the function of acquiring the current position information of the host vehicle. Further, when the position information of the vehicle 420 is received at step S802, it may be calculated using the received information. In addition, considering the speed change that can occur before reaching the confluence point P, the confluence time is calculated not as a time but as a time zone with a predetermined width.
[0139] そして、合流側路側機 940aは、本線側路側機 930に対して、ステップ S1203で算 出した合流時刻を含んだ照合要求を送信する (ステップ S 1204)。照合要求とは、車 両 420の合流時刻と同時刻に、合流地点 Pに到達する車両 410が存在するかを合流 側路側機 940aが照合要求するものである。なお、本線側路側機 930は複数設置さ れているが、照合要求を送信するのは、すべての本線側路側機 930でもよいし、い ずれ力 1つの本線側路側機 930であってもよい。  Then, merging side roadside device 940a transmits a verification request including the merging time calculated in step S1203 to main line side roadside device 930 (step S1204). The verification request is for the merging side roadside device 940a to verify whether there is a vehicle 410 that reaches the merging point P at the same time as the merging time of the vehicle 420. In addition, although there are a plurality of main line side roadside machines 930, all main line side roadside machines 930 may send a verification request, or any main line side roadside machine 930 may send a matching request. .
[0140] 合流側路側機 940aは、本線側路側機 930から照合要求に対する返信があるまで 待機する (ステップ S 1205 : Noのループ)。本線側路側機 930から照合要求に対す る返信があると (ステップ S1205 : Yes)、返信された照合結果を元にして、車両 420 と車両 410とに衝突可能性があるカゝ否かを判断する (ステップ S1206)。  [0140] Junction side roadside machine 940a waits until a reply to the verification request is received from main line side roadside machine 930 (step S1205: No loop). When there is a response to the verification request from the main line side roadside machine 930 (Step S1205: Yes), it is determined whether there is a possibility of collision between the vehicle 420 and the vehicle 410 based on the returned verification result. (Step S1206).
[0141] 衝突可能性があるかの判断は、返信された照合結果を元にしておこなう。たとえば 、受信した照合結果に、車両 410の合流時刻、走行速度、位置情報などが含まれる 場合は、衝突可能性ありと判断する。また、照合結果が該当する車両 410がない旨 の情報である場合は、衝突可能性なしと判断する。なお、実施例 1と同様に、衝突可 能性があるかの判断は、本線側路側機 930でおこなってもよ 、。  [0141] Whether there is a possibility of collision is determined based on the returned collation result. For example, if the received collation result includes the merging time, traveling speed, position information, etc. of the vehicle 410, it is determined that there is a possibility of collision. If the collation result is information indicating that there is no applicable vehicle 410, it is determined that there is no possibility of collision. As in Example 1, the determination of whether there is a possibility of a collision may be made by the main line side roadside machine 930.
[0142] そして、衝突可能性がある場合は (ステップ S 1206: Yes)、他の合流側路側機 940 b〜940mに警告情報を送信して (ステップ S1207)、本フローチャートによる処理を 終了する。一方、衝突可能性がない場合は (ステップ S 1206 : No)、警告情報の送 信はおこなわず、本フローチャートによる処理を終了する。なお、このとき、衝突可能 性はな!/、旨の情報を、他の合流側路側機 940b〜940mに送信することとしてもょ ヽ [0143] ここで、警告情報とは、衝突可能性がある車両 410の存在を、車両 420の運転者に 警告する情報である。具体的には、衝突可能性がある車両 410の合流時刻や走行 速度、位置情報、衝突を回避するための具体的な措置などの情報である。車両 420 の通信機 421では、送信された警告情報を画面表示や音声出力することによって、 衝突可能性のある車両 410の存在を車両 420の運転者に報知する。車両 420の運 転者は、通信機 421から報知される情報を元に、車両 410との衝突を回避する措置( たとえば走行速度の低減、車線変更など)を講じる。 [0142] If there is a possibility of a collision (step S1206: Yes), warning information is transmitted to the other merging side roadside devices 940b to 940m (step S1207), and the processing according to this flowchart ends. On the other hand, when there is no possibility of collision (step S1206: No), the warning information is not transmitted, and the processing according to this flowchart is terminated. At this time, information indicating that there is no possibility of collision! / Is sent to other merging roadside devices 940b to 940m. [0143] Here, the warning information is information that warns the driver of the vehicle 420 of the presence of the vehicle 410 that may collide. Specifically, it is information such as the merging time, traveling speed, position information, and specific measures for avoiding the collision of the vehicle 410 that may collide. The communicator 421 of the vehicle 420 notifies the driver of the vehicle 420 of the presence of the vehicle 410 that is likely to collide by displaying the transmitted warning information on a screen or by outputting sound. Based on the information notified from the communication device 421, the driver of the vehicle 420 takes measures to avoid a collision with the vehicle 410 (for example, reduction of travel speed, lane change, etc.).
[0144] つぎに、他の合流側路側機 940b〜940mがおこなう運転支援処理の手順につい て説明する。図 13は、他の合流側路側機がおこなう運転支援処理の手順を示すフロ 一チャートである。図 13のフローチャートにおいて、他の合流側路側機 940b〜940 mは、合流側路側機 940aが送信する警告情報を受信するまで待機する (ステップ S 1301: Noのループ)。警告情報を受信すると (ステップ S 1301: Yes)、他の合流側 路側機 940b〜940mは、受信した警告情報から車両 420の IDを抽出する (ステップ S1302) o [0144] Next, the procedure of the driving support processing performed by the other merging side roadside devices 940b to 940m will be described. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure of driving support processing performed by another merging roadside device. In the flowchart of FIG. 13, the other merging side roadside devices 940b to 940m wait until receiving the warning information transmitted by the merging side roadside device 940a (step S1301: No loop). When the warning information is received (step S1301: Yes), the other merging roadside units 940b to 940m extract the vehicle 420 ID from the received warning information (step S1302) o
[0145] そして、他の合流側路側機 940b〜940mは、自装置の近傍を車両 420が通過す るまで待機する(ステップ S 1303 : Noのループ)。車両 420が通過すると(ステップ S 1 303 : Yes)、通過した車両 420から IDを受信する(ステップ S 1304)。そして、受信し た IDとステップ S1302で抽出した IDとを照合し、警告情報の送信先か否かを判断す る(ステップ S 1305)。  [0145] Then, the other merging side roadside units 940b to 940m wait until the vehicle 420 passes in the vicinity of the own device (step S1303: No loop). When the vehicle 420 passes (step S 1 303: Yes), an ID is received from the passed vehicle 420 (step S 1304). Then, the received ID and the ID extracted in step S1302 are collated, and it is determined whether or not the destination is the warning information (step S1305).
[0146] 警告情報の送信先である場合 (ステップ S 1305 : Yes)、すなわち、ステップ S1304 で受信した IDとステップ S1302で抽出した IDとが等しい場合は、その IDに対応する 車両 420の合流時刻情報を受信したかを判断する (ステップ S 1306)。ここで、合流 時刻情報とは、図 11のステップ S1106において、他の本線側路側機 930a〜930n が送信した情報である。  [0146] If it is the destination of the warning information (step S1305: Yes), that is, if the ID received in step S1304 and the ID extracted in step S1302 are equal, the merge time of the vehicle 420 corresponding to that ID It is determined whether information has been received (step S 1306). Here, the merging time information is information transmitted from the other main roadside units 930a to 930n in step S1106 of FIG.
[0147] 合流時刻情報を受信した場合は (ステップ S 1306: Yes)、受信した合流時刻を参 照して、車両 420と監視対象車両との衝突が回避されたかを判断する (ステップ S13 07)。衝突が回避されたか否かの判断は、たとえば、新たに受信した監視対象車両 の合流時刻と、車両 420の合流時刻との差分が、所定時間以上の場合には、衝突可 能性がなくなり衝突は回避されたと判断し、所定時間未満の場合には、衝突可能性 力 くならず衝突は回避されていないと判断する。 [0147] When the joining time information is received (step S1306: Yes), it is determined by referring to the received joining time whether the collision between the vehicle 420 and the monitored vehicle is avoided (step S13 07). . The judgment as to whether or not the collision has been avoided is, for example, a newly received monitored vehicle If the difference between the merging time of the vehicle and the merging time of the vehicle 420 is equal to or greater than the predetermined time, it is determined that the collision has been avoided and the collision has been avoided. Therefore, it is determined that the collision is not avoided.
[0148] 衝突が回避された場合には (ステップ S1307 :Yes)、ステップ S1301で受信した警 告情報を送信せず、本フローチャートによる処理を終了する。一方、衝突が回避され な 、場合や (ステップ S 1307: No)、合流時刻情報を受信しな力つた場合は (ステツ プ S 1306 : No)、ステップ SI 301で受信した警告情報を送信して(ステップ SI 308) 、本フローチャートによる処理を終了する。  [0148] When the collision is avoided (step S1307: Yes), the warning information received in step S1301 is not transmitted, and the processing according to this flowchart is terminated. On the other hand, if the collision is not avoided (step S1307: No), or if the merging time information is not received (step S1306: No), the warning information received in step SI301 is transmitted. (Step SI 308) The processing according to this flowchart is terminated.
[0149] ステップ S1308で警告情報を送信された車両 420の通信機 421は、送信された警 告情報を画面表示や音声出力することによって、衝突可能性のある車両 410 (監視 対象車両)の存在を車両 420の運転者に報知する。車両 420の運転者は、通信機 4 21から報知される情報を元に、車両 410との衝突を回避する措置 (たとえば走行速 度の低減、車線変更など)を講じることができる。  [0149] The communication device 421 of the vehicle 420 to which the warning information is transmitted in step S1308 displays the transmitted warning information on a screen or outputs a sound, so that there is a vehicle 410 (monitoring target vehicle) that may have a collision. Is notified to the driver of the vehicle 420. The driver of the vehicle 420 can take measures to avoid a collision with the vehicle 410 (for example, reduction of travel speed, lane change, etc.) based on the information notified from the communication device 421.
[0150] 以上説明したように、実施例 2にかかる運転支援システム 900では、本線 L1および 合流車線 L2にそれぞれ複数台ずつ設置された路側機 930, 940によって車両 410 , 420の走行状態を監視する。このように、複数台の路側機 930, 940を設けることに よって、それぞれの車両 410, 420の走行状態を、より正確に把握することができる。  [0150] As described above, in the driving support system 900 according to the second embodiment, the traveling state of the vehicles 410 and 420 is monitored by the roadside machines 930 and 940 installed in the main line L1 and the merging lane L2, respectively. . Thus, by providing a plurality of roadside machines 930 and 940, it is possible to grasp the traveling state of the respective vehicles 410 and 420 more accurately.
[0151] なお、上述した実施例では、路上に設置された路側機において、合流時刻の算出 や衝突可能性がある力否かの判断などの処理をおこなった力 これらの処理をおこ なうための通信サーバを設けることとしてもよい。この場合、各路側機は、車両 410, 4 20からの ID、走行方向、走行速度、位置情報の受信処理 (たとえば、図 6のステップ S601、図 8のステップ S802など)および、警告情報の送信処理 (たとえば、図 8のス テツプ S807など)のみをおこなうこととなる。このため、各路側機 440の構成は、通信 サーバおよび車両 410, 420との通信部を備えていればよぐ路上に設置する路側 機に関しては簡易な構成で運転支援を実現することができる。  [0151] In the above-described embodiment, the roadside machine installed on the road is used to calculate the merging time and determine whether or not there is a possibility of collision. In order to perform these processes A communication server may be provided. In this case, each roadside unit receives ID, traveling direction, traveling speed, and position information from the vehicles 410 and 420 (for example, step S601 in FIG. 6, step S802 in FIG. 8, etc.) and transmission of warning information. Only processing (for example, step S807 in FIG. 8) is performed. Therefore, the configuration of each roadside unit 440 can realize driving support with a simple configuration with respect to the roadside unit installed on the road as long as it includes a communication unit and a communication unit with the vehicles 410 and 420.
[0152] また、上述した実施例において、合流側路側機 440, 940で、車両 420の走行速 度を継続的に監視し、速度変化があった場合は、本線側路側機 430, 930を介して 車両 410に通知をおこなうこととしてもよい。これにより、本線 L1を走行する車両 410 で合流車線 L2を走行する車両 420の走行状態を把握して、衝突を回避する措置を 講じることがでさる。 [0152] In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the traveling speed of the vehicle 420 is continuously monitored by the merging side roadside machines 440 and 940, and if there is a speed change, the main roadside roadside machines 430 and 930 are used. The vehicle 410 may be notified. As a result, the vehicle 410 traveling on the main line L1 In this way, it is possible to grasp the traveling state of the vehicle 420 traveling on the merging lane L2 and take measures to avoid the collision.
[0153] 以上説明したように、運転支援システムによれば、合流地点 Pに合流する 2つの車 線 LI, L2のうち、本線 L1から合流地点 Pに向力つて移動している車両 410の有無に ついての情報を、合流車線 L2を移動している車両 420に送信することができる。これ により、車両 420は、合流地点 Pにおいて車両 410と衝突する可能性があるかどうか を知ることができる。  [0153] As described above, according to the driving support system, of the two lanes LI, L2 that merge at the merge point P, the presence or absence of the vehicle 410 that is moving from the main line L1 to the merge point P by force. Information about this can be sent to the vehicle 420 traveling in the merged lane L2. As a result, the vehicle 420 can know whether or not there is a possibility of collision with the vehicle 410 at the junction P.
[0154] また、判断結果とともに車両 410の移動速度の変化に関する検出結果を、車両 42 0に送信する。これにより、合流地点 Pでの衝突を回避するための策を講じる際に判 断材料となる情報を、車両 420の運転者に与えることができる。さらに、移動速度に 関する情報を元に、車両 410が合流地点に到達する時間 (合流時刻)の変化を検出 し、車両 420に送信することによって、より詳細な判断材料を与えることができる。  [0154] In addition to the determination result, the detection result regarding the change in the moving speed of the vehicle 410 is transmitted to the vehicle 420. As a result, it is possible to provide the driver of the vehicle 420 with information that can be used as a judgment material when taking measures to avoid a collision at the junction P. Furthermore, based on the information on the moving speed, a change in the time when the vehicle 410 reaches the joining point (joining time) is detected and transmitted to the vehicle 420, so that more detailed judgment material can be given.
[0155] また、車両 410および 420の衝突可能性があるかを判断し、車両 410に送信する。  [0155] Further, it is determined whether or not there is a possibility of collision between vehicles 410 and 420, and is transmitted to vehicle 410.
これにより、車両 410の運転者に対しても、合流地点 Pでの衝突を回避するための策 を講じる際に判断材料となる情報を与えることができる。さらに、車両 410の移動速度 に関する情報を連続的に受信し、検出した移動速度の変化を車両 420に送信する。 これにより、車両 420では、合流地点 Pに至るまでのルートにおいて、車両 410の変 化に応じて衝突回避のための動作をおこなうことができる。  As a result, the driver of the vehicle 410 can be given information as a judgment material when taking measures to avoid a collision at the junction P. Further, information regarding the moving speed of vehicle 410 is continuously received, and the detected change in moving speed is transmitted to vehicle 420. As a result, the vehicle 420 can perform an operation for avoiding a collision in accordance with the change of the vehicle 410 in the route to the junction P.
[0156] また、路側機 430, 440の位置を車両 410, 420の位置と近似することによって、車 両 410, 420から位置に関する情報を受信しなくても、合流地点に到達する時間を算 出することができ、車両 410, 420から受信する情報を軽減することができる。  [0156] Also, by approximating the position of the roadside units 430 and 440 to the position of the vehicles 410 and 420, the time to reach the junction can be calculated without receiving position information from the vehicles 410 and 420. The information received from the vehicles 410 and 420 can be reduced.
[0157] (実施の形態 2)  [0157] (Embodiment 2)
はじめに、実施の形態 2にかかる運転支援システム 2100の機能的構成について説 明する。図 14は、実施の形態 2にかかる運転支援システムの機能的構成を示すプロ ック図である。図 14のブロック図において、運転支援システム 2100は、第 1の通信装 置 2110と、第 2の通信装置 2120とから構成される。  First, the functional configuration of the driving support system 2100 according to the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 14 is a block diagram showing a functional configuration of the driving support system according to the second embodiment. In the block diagram of FIG. 14, the driving support system 2100 includes a first communication device 2110 and a second communication device 2120.
[0158] 第 1の通信装置 2110は、合流地点に合流する 2つのルートのうち一方のルートの 近傍に設置されている。また、第 2の通信装置 2120は、他方のルートの近傍に設置 されている。運転支援システム 2100は、第 1の通信装置 2110および第 2の通信装 置 2120によって、合流地点近傍を移動する移動体の運転を支援する。 [0158] The first communication device 2110 is installed in the vicinity of one of the two routes joining the joining point. The second communication device 2120 is installed near the other route. Has been. The driving support system 2100 uses the first communication device 2110 and the second communication device 2120 to support driving of a moving body that moves near the junction.
[0159] 第 1の通信装置 2110は、受信部 2111、判断部 2112、送信部 2113、算出部 211 4によって構成される。受信部 2111は、一方のルートを移動している第 1の移動体の 進行方向に関する情報を第 1の移動体力 受信する。移動体の進行方向に関する 情報とは、たとえば、第 1の移動体に搭載された通信機から送信される移動体の移動 方向情報や目的地点情報などである。  The first communication device 2110 includes a reception unit 2111, a determination unit 2112, a transmission unit 2113, and a calculation unit 2114. The receiving unit 2111 receives information on the traveling direction of the first moving body that is moving along one route, the first moving body force. The information related to the traveling direction of the moving object is, for example, moving direction information or destination point information of the moving object transmitted from the communication device mounted on the first moving object.
[0160] また、受信部 2111は、第 1の移動体の移動速度に関する情報を受信する。移動速 度に関する情報とは、たとえば、第 1の移動体に搭載された通信機から送信される現 在速度情報や、後述するような速度計測用電波の反射波などである。  [0160] In addition, the reception unit 2111 receives information on the moving speed of the first moving body. The information on the moving speed is, for example, current speed information transmitted from a communication device mounted on the first moving body, or a reflected wave of speed measuring radio waves as described later.
[0161] 受信部 2111は、たとえば、自装置の近傍を通過する移動体に搭載された通信機 に対して、移動方向や移動速度に関する情報の取得要求信号を送信し、返信された 情報を受信する。また、たとえば、移動体に対して速度計測用電波を発射し、その反 射波を受信することによって移動速度および移動方向を得ることとしてもよい。  [0161] Receiving section 2111 transmits an acquisition request signal for information on the moving direction and moving speed, for example, to a communication device mounted on a moving body that passes in the vicinity of its own device, and receives the returned information. To do. Further, for example, a moving speed and a moving direction may be obtained by emitting a velocity measurement radio wave to a moving body and receiving the reflected wave.
[0162] 判断部 2112は、受信部 2111によって受信された進行方向に関する情報に基づ いて、第 1の移動体が合流地点に向力つて移動しているか否かを判断する。判断部 2 112は、具体的には、たとえば、第 1の移動体の進行方向が変化しないまま、道なり に走行した場合、合流地点に到達するか否かによって、第 1の移動体が合流地点に 向かって移動して ヽる力否かを判断する。  Determination unit 2112 determines whether or not the first moving body is moving toward the joining point based on the information on the traveling direction received by receiving unit 2111. Specifically, for example, when the traveling unit travels along the road while the traveling direction of the first moving body does not change, the determining unit 2112 determines whether the first moving body joins depending on whether or not the merging point is reached. Judge whether or not to move to the point and hit.
[0163] 送信部 2113は、判断部 2112によって判断された判断結果を、第 2の通信装置 21 20に送信する。送信部 2113は、たとえば、第 2の通信装置 2120から送信される判 断結果の送信要求に応じて、判断部 2112の判断結果を送信する。  Transmitting section 2113 transmits the determination result determined by determining section 2112 to second communication device 2120. For example, the transmission unit 2113 transmits the determination result of the determination unit 2112 in response to the determination result transmission request transmitted from the second communication device 2120.
[0164] また、送信部 2113は、判断結果とともに、受信部 2111によって受信された移動速 度に関する情報を、第 2の通信装置 2120に送信してもよい。さらに、後述する算出 部 2114によって第 1の移動体が合流地点に到達する時間が算出された場合は、そ の算出結果を第 2の通信装置 2120に送信することとしてもよい。  [0164] In addition, the transmission unit 2113 may transmit information on the moving speed received by the reception unit 2111 to the second communication device 2120 together with the determination result. Further, when the time required for the first mobile unit to reach the joining point is calculated by the calculation unit 2114 described later, the calculation result may be transmitted to the second communication device 2120.
[0165] 算出部 2114は、受信部 2111によって受信された移動速度に関する情報に基づ いて、第 1の移動体が合流地点に到達する時間を算出する。ここで、合流地点に到 達する時間とは、時刻のように時間軸上の一点を特定するものでもよいし、時間帯の ように一定の幅がある時間であってもよ!/、。 [0165] Calculation section 2114 calculates the time for the first moving body to reach the joining point based on the information on the moving speed received by receiving section 2111. Here, it reaches the confluence The reaching time may be a point on the time axis such as time, or a time with a certain range such as a time zone! /.
[0166] 算出部 2114は、具体的には、たとえば、第 1の移動体から、その現在位置を示す 現在位置情報を取得し、現在位置力も合流地点までの距離を算出する。そして、算 出した距離を現在の走行速度で除算することによって、第 1の移動体が合流地点に 到達する時間を算出する。  Specifically, for example, the calculation unit 2114 obtains current position information indicating the current position from the first moving body, and calculates the current position force and the distance to the merge point. Then, by dividing the calculated distance by the current travel speed, the time for the first moving body to reach the junction is calculated.
[0167] また、算出部 2114は、たとえば、装置本体が一方のルートの近傍に設置されてい る場合、装置本体の位置を第 1の移動体の位置に近似して、第 1の移動体の移動速 度に関する情報と、装置本体と合流地点間の距離と、に基づいて、第 1の移動体が 合流地点に到達する時間を算出する。すなわち、装置本体と合流地点間の距離を、 第 1の移動体の速度で除算することによって、合流地点に到達するまでの時間を算 出することとしてもよい。  [0167] Also, for example, when the apparatus main body is installed in the vicinity of one route, the calculation unit 2114 approximates the position of the apparatus main body to the position of the first moving body, and Based on the information on the moving speed and the distance between the main unit and the meeting point, the time for the first moving body to reach the meeting point is calculated. That is, the time required to reach the merge point may be calculated by dividing the distance between the apparatus main body and the merge point by the speed of the first moving body.
[0168] つぎに、第 2の通信装置 2120の機能的構成について説明する。第 2の通信装置 2 120は、受信部 2121と、送信部 2122とによって構成される。受信部 2121は、第 1の 通信装置 2110の送信部 2113によって送信された判断結果を受信する。また、受信 部 2121は、第 1の通信装置 2110の送信部 2113によって、第 1の移動体の移動速 度に関する情報や、第 1の移動体が合流地点に到達する時間が送信された場合は、 第 1の移動体の移動速度に関する情報や、第 1の移動体が合流地点に到達する時 間を受信する。  Next, the functional configuration of second communication apparatus 2120 will be described. The second communication device 2 120 includes a reception unit 2121 and a transmission unit 2122. The reception unit 2121 receives the determination result transmitted by the transmission unit 2113 of the first communication device 2110. In addition, the receiving unit 2121 receives information on the moving speed of the first moving body or the time required for the first moving body to reach the joining point by the transmitting unit 2113 of the first communication device 2110. Receives information about the moving speed of the first moving body and the time for the first moving body to reach the junction.
[0169] 送信部 2122は、受信部 2121によって受信された判断結果を、他方のルートを移 動している第 2の移動体に送信する。また、送信部 2122は、受信部 2121によって、 第 1の移動体の移動速度に関する情報や、第 1の移動体が合流地点に到達する時 間が受信された場合には、第 2の移動体に対して、第 1の移動体の移動速度に関す る情報や、第 1の移動体が合流地点に到達する時間を送信する。  Transmitting section 2122 transmits the determination result received by receiving section 2121 to the second moving body that is moving on the other route. In addition, when the reception unit 2121 receives the information related to the moving speed of the first moving body or the time when the first moving body reaches the junction, the transmitting unit 2122 receives the second moving body. In response to this, the information about the moving speed of the first moving body and the time for the first moving body to reach the meeting point are transmitted.
[0170] 送信部 2122は、たとえば、第 2の移動体が第 2の通信装置 2120の近傍を通過し た際に、第 2の移動体の通信用アドレスを取得しておき、取得した通信アドレスを用 V、て第 2の移動体に判断結果を送信する。  [0170] For example, when the second mobile unit passes the vicinity of the second communication device 2120, the transmission unit 2122 acquires the communication address of the second mobile unit and acquires the acquired communication address. V and send the judgment result to the second mobile unit.
[0171] つぎに、運転支援システム 2100の運転支援処理の手順について説明する。図 15 は、運転支援システムの運転支援処理の手順を示すフローチャートである。図 15に おいて、まず、運転支援システム 2100は、第 1の通信装置 2110において、第 1の移 動体の進行方向および速度に関する情報を受信する (ステップ S2201)。これらの情 報の受信は、受信部 2111によっておこなう。 [0171] Next, the procedure of the driving support process of the driving support system 2100 will be described. Fig 15 These are the flowcharts which show the procedure of the driving assistance process of a driving assistance system. In FIG. 15, first, the driving support system 2100 receives information on the traveling direction and speed of the first moving body at the first communication device 2110 (step S2201). The reception unit 2111 receives these information.
[0172] そして、判断部 2112によって、第 1の移動体が合流地点に向力つて移動している か否かを判断する (ステップ S2202)。第 1の移動体が合流地点に向力つて移動して いる場合は (ステップ S2202 : Yes)、算出部 2114によって第 1の移動体が合流地点 に到達する時間(到達時間)を算出する (ステップ S2203)。そして、送信部 2113に よって、第 1の移動体が合流地点に向力つている旨の情報および到達時間を第 2の 通信装置 2120【こ送信し (ステップ S2204)、ステップ S2206【こ移行する。  [0172] Then, the determining unit 2112 determines whether or not the first moving body is moving toward the joining point (step S2202). When the first moving body is moving toward the meeting point (step S2202: Yes), the calculation unit 2114 calculates the time (arrival time) for the first moving body to reach the meeting point (step) S2203). Then, the transmitting unit 2113 transmits information indicating that the first moving body is moving toward the meeting point and the arrival time, and transmits the second communication device 2120 (step S2204), and then proceeds to step S2206.
[0173] 一方、ステップ S2202において、第 1の移動体が合流地点に向かって移動してい ない場合は (ステップ S2202 :No)、送信部 2113によって、第 1の移動体は合流地 点に向力つていない旨の情報を第 2の通信装置 2120に送信する(ステップ S2205) 。なお、合流地点に向かっている移動体はない旨の情報の送信は、省略してもよい。 すなわち、第 1の通信装置 2110からの情報送信がないことをもって、第 1の移動体 は合流地点に向かって!/、な 、ことを示すこととしてもよ!/、。  [0173] On the other hand, if the first moving body is not moving toward the joining point in Step S2202 (Step S2202: No), the transmitting unit 2113 causes the first moving body to exert a directing force on the joining point. Information indicating that it is not connected is transmitted to second communication apparatus 2120 (step S2205). In addition, you may abbreviate | omit transmission of the information that there is no moving body which is heading to a junction. In other words, when there is no information transmission from the first communication device 2110, the first mobile unit may indicate to the joining point! /, Or! /.
[0174] つぎに、第 2の通信装置 2120において、第 1の通信装置 2110によって送信された 判断結果などを受信する (ステップ S2206)。これらの情報の受信は、第 2の通信装 置 2120の受信咅 2121【こよっておこなう。そして、送信咅 2122【こよって、ステップ S2 206で受信した情報を第 2の移動体に送信して (ステップ S2207)、本フローチャート による処理を終了する。  Next, the second communication device 2120 receives the determination result and the like transmitted by the first communication device 2110 (step S2206). The reception of these pieces of information is performed by the reception unit 2121 of the second communication device 2120. Then, the transmission unit 2122 [Thus, the information received in step S2206 is transmitted to the second mobile unit (step S2207), and the processing in this flowchart ends.
[0175] なお、第 2の通信装置 2120に算出部、判断部を設け、第 1の通信装置 2110から 送信された判断結果だけでなぐ第 1の通信装置 2110から送信された第 1の移動体 の合流地点に到達する時間と、第 2の移動体の合流地点に到達する時間とを比較し て、合流地点にて鉢合わせになる可能性を判断し、その結果を含めて送信するよう にしてもよい。  Note that the second communication device 2120 is provided with a calculation unit and a determination unit, and the first mobile unit transmitted from the first communication device 2110 includes only the determination result transmitted from the first communication device 2110. Compare the time to reach the merging point with the time to reach the merging point of the second mobile unit, determine the possibility of matching at the merging point, and send the result including the result. Also good.
[0176] たとえば、第 2の通信装置 2120の受信部 2121は、第 1の通信装置 2110の受信部 2111と同様にして他方のルートを移動して 、る第 2の移動体力 進行方向に関する 情報と移動速度に関する情報を受信する。そして、第 2の移動体の現在位置と合流 地点までの距離及び第 2の移動体の移動速度から、第 2の移動体が合流地点に到 達する時間を算出部にて算出する。そして、判断部にて、第 1の移動体の合流地点 に到達する時間と第 2の移動体の合流地点に到達する時間とを比較して両者が鉢合 わせする可能性を判断し、その判断結果を第 2の移動体に送信する。 [0176] For example, the reception unit 2121 of the second communication device 2120 moves along the other route in the same manner as the reception unit 2111 of the first communication device 2110, and relates to the traveling direction of the second mobile physical force. Receive information and information about travel speed. Then, the time for the second moving body to reach the joining point is calculated by the calculation unit from the current position of the second moving body and the distance to the joining point and the moving speed of the second moving body. Then, the determination unit compares the time to reach the meeting point of the first moving object and the time to reach the meeting point of the second moving object, and determines the possibility that both will match, The determination result is transmitted to the second mobile unit.
[0177] さらには、第 1の通信装置 2110による第 1の移動体に対する処理と同等の処理を 第 2の通信装置 2120の第 2の移動体に対する処理として行わせ、それらの処理を同 時に行わせることにより第 1の移動体及び第 2の移動体の各々に、第 1の通信装置 2 110と第 2の通信装置 2120の各々の判断結果を相互に送信するようにしてもよい。  [0177] Furthermore, the same processing as the processing for the first moving body by the first communication device 2110 is performed as the processing for the second moving body of the second communication device 2120, and these processing are performed simultaneously. Thus, the determination results of the first communication device 2110 and the second communication device 2120 may be transmitted to the first mobile body and the second mobile body, respectively.
[0178] 以上説明したように、実施の形態 2にかかる運転支援システム 2100によれば、合流 地点に合流する 2つのルートのうち、一方のルートから合流地点に向力つて移動して V、る第 1の移動体の有無にっ 、ての情報を、他方のルートを移動して 、る第 2の移動 体に送信することができる。これにより、第 2の移動体は、合流地点において第 1の移 動体と衝突する可能性があるかどうかを知ることができる。  [0178] As described above, according to the driving support system 2100 according to the second embodiment, of the two routes merging to the merge point, the one moves from one route to the merge point and moves to V. Depending on the presence or absence of the first mobile body, all the information can be transmitted to the second mobile body moving along the other route. As a result, the second moving body can know whether or not there is a possibility of colliding with the first moving body at the junction.
[0179] また、判断結果とともに第 1の移動体の移動速度に関する情報を、第 2の移動体に 送信する。これにより、合流地点での衝突を回避するための策を講じる際に判断材料 となる情報を、第 2の移動体の運転者に与えることができる。さらに、移動速度に関す る情報を元に、第 1の移動体が合流地点に到達する時間を算出し、第 2の移動体に 送信することによって、より詳細な判断材料を与えることができる。  [0179] Also, information on the moving speed of the first moving body is transmitted to the second moving body together with the determination result. As a result, it is possible to give information to the driver of the second moving body as a judgment material when taking measures for avoiding the collision at the junction. Furthermore, based on the information on the moving speed, the time for the first moving body to reach the joining point is calculated and transmitted to the second moving body, so that more detailed judgment material can be given.
[0180] また、第 1の通信装置 2110の位置を第 1の移動体の位置と近似することによって、 第 1の移動体力 位置に関する情報を受信しなくても、合流地点に到達する時間を 算出することができ、第 1の移動体力も受信する情報を軽減することができる。  [0180] Also, by approximating the position of the first communication device 2110 to the position of the first moving body, the time to reach the merge point is calculated without receiving information about the first moving body force position. And the information received by the first mobile strength can be reduced.
[0181] (実施例 1)  [0181] (Example 1)
つぎに、上述した実施の形態 2にかかる運転支援システム 2100の実施例 1につい て説明する。以下の実施例においては、運転支援システム 2100を道路脇に設置さ れた路側機 2330 (2330a, 2330b)および、車両 2310, 2320に搭載された通信機 2311, 2321からなる運転支援システム 2300に適用した場合について説明する。な お、以下説明する各実施例において、運転支援システムのシステム構成、ハードゥエ ァ構成などは同様である。 Next, Example 1 of the driving support system 2100 according to the second embodiment will be described. In the following examples, the driving support system 2100 is applied to the driving support system 2300 including the roadside devices 2330 (2330a, 2330b) installed on the side of the road and the communication devices 2311, 2321 mounted on the vehicles 2310, 2320. The case will be described. In each example described below, the system configuration of the driving support system, the hard The configuration is the same.
[0182] まず、実施例 1にかかる運転支援システム 2300が適用される交通状況について説 明する。図 16は、実施例 1にかかる運転支援システムが適用される交通状況を示す 説明図である。図 16において、合流地点の一例として、高速道路の本線 L1と合流車 線 L2とが交差する合流地点 Pが図示されている。合流地点 Pの周辺には、移動体の 一 ί列として車両 2310 (2310a〜2310c) , 2320 (2320a, 2320b)力走行して! /、る。 車両 2310は本線 L1を走行する車両、車両 2320は合流車線 L2を走行する車両で ある。  [0182] First, the traffic situation to which the driving support system 2300 according to the first embodiment is applied will be described. FIG. 16 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a traffic situation to which the driving support system according to the first embodiment is applied. In FIG. 16, as an example of a merging point, a merging point P where the main road L1 and the merging lane L2 of the expressway intersect is shown. In the vicinity of the confluence point P, drive the vehicle 2310 (2310a to 2310c), 2320 (2320a, 2320b) as a line of moving objects! The vehicle 2310 is a vehicle traveling on the main line L1, and the vehicle 2320 is a vehicle traveling on the merge lane L2.
[0183] 車両 2310, 2320には、それぞれ通信機 2311 (2311a〜2311c) , 2321 (2321a , 2321b)力搭載されて!ヽる。通信機 2311, 2321ίま、車両 2310, 2320力 ^それぞれ 走行する道路脇に設置された路側機 2330と交信し、自車の走行情報を送信したり、 運転支援情報を受信したりする。  [0183] The vehicles 2310 and 2320 are equipped with communication devices 2311 (2311a to 2311c) and 2321 (2321a and 2321b), respectively. Communication equipment 2311, 2321ί, vehicle 2310, 2320 power ^ Each communicates with the roadside machine 2330 installed on the side of the road where it travels, and sends its own driving information and receives driving assistance information.
[0184] また、車両 2310, 2320は、それぞれ自車を特定する IDが、たとえば、 IPアドレス のように、それぞれの車両 2310, 2320に一意に割り振られている。この IDは、運転 支援システム 2300【こお!ヽて通信用アドレス【こ用!ヽられ、通信機 2311, 2321»,車 両 2310, 2320の IDを用いて特定の車両 2310, 2320に情報を送信することができ る。それぞれの車両 2310, 2320の IDは、それぞれの通信機 2311, 2321に記憶さ れている。  [0184] Also, the vehicles 2310 and 2320 are each uniquely assigned an ID for identifying their own vehicle, such as an IP address, for example. This ID is assigned to the driver support system 2300 [KOO! Telecom address] [Used!], And the information of a specific vehicle 2310, 2320 is transmitted using the ID of the communication device 2311, 2321 », vehicle 2310, 2320. Can be sent. The IDs of the vehicles 2310 and 2320 are stored in the communication devices 2311 and 2321, respectively.
[0185] 路側機 2330aは、本線 L1の近傍に設置されており、本線 L1を走行し、路側機 233 Oaの側を通過する車両 2310の通信機 2311と交信する。また、路側機 2330bは、合 流車線 L2の近傍に設置されており、合流車線 L2を走行し、路側機 2330bの側を通 過する車両 2320の通信機 2321と交信する。以下、特に 2つの路側機を区別する必 要がある場合、路側機 2330aを本線側路側機 2330a、路側機 2330bを合流側路側 機 2330bと! /、う。  [0185] The roadside machine 2330a is installed in the vicinity of the main line L1, travels on the main line L1, and communicates with the communication device 2311 of the vehicle 2310 passing the roadside machine 233Oa side. The roadside machine 2330b is installed in the vicinity of the junction lane L2, travels on the junction lane L2, and communicates with the communication device 2321 of the vehicle 2320 passing through the roadside machine 2330b side. In the following, when it is necessary to distinguish between the two roadside machines, the roadside machine 2330a will be referred to as the main line side roadside machine 2330a, and the roadside machine 2330b will be referred to as the merge side roadside machine 2330b.
[0186] 本線側路側機 2330a、合流側路側機 2330bの通信範囲は、それぞれ図 16中の 点線で示すエリア A, Bである。エリア A, Bは、それぞれ合流地点 Pを含み、エリア内 をそれぞれ異なる速度で走行し、かつ、同時刻に合流地点 Pに達する車両 2310, 2 320とそれぞれ交信可能である。また、本線側路側機 2330aと合流側路側機 2330b は、相互に通信することができる。 [0186] The communication ranges of the main line side roadside machine 2330a and the merge side roadside machine 2330b are areas A and B indicated by dotted lines in FIG. 16, respectively. Areas A and B each include a meeting point P, and can communicate with vehicles 2310 and 2320 that travel at different speeds in the area and reach the meeting point P at the same time. Also, main line side roadside machine 2330a and merge side roadside machine 2330b Can communicate with each other.
[0187] 本線側路側機 2330aと合流側路側機 2330bは、それぞれ、本線 L1ある 、は合流 車線 L2の平均的な速度で車両 2310, 2320が走行した場合に、合流地点 Pに到着 するまで力かる時間が等しくなる距離 (以下、等時間距離という)に設置される。たとえ ば、本線 L1の平均速度が 80kmZh、合流車線 L2の平均速度が 50kmZhの場合、 本線側路側機 2330aは合流地点 Pから約 2670m、合流側路側機 2330bは合流地 点 Pから約 1670mにそれぞれ設けられる。これにより、それぞれの路側機 2330は、 合流地点 Pに到達するまで 120秒の等時間距離に設けられることとなる。  [0187] The main roadside unit 2330a and the confluence side roadside unit 2330b are used until they reach the confluence point P when the vehicles 2310 and 2320 travel at the average speed of the main line L1 or the confluence lane L2. It is installed at a distance where the time is equal (hereinafter referred to as equal time distance). For example, if the average speed of main line L1 is 80kmZh and the average speed of merge lane L2 is 50kmZh, main roadside machine 2330a is approximately 2670m from merge point P, and merge roadside machine 2330b is approximately 1670m from merge point P. Provided. As a result, each roadside unit 2330 is provided at an equidistant distance of 120 seconds until the junction point P is reached.
[0188] ここで、運転支援システム 2300がおこなう運転支援の概要を説明する。本線側路 側機 2330aは、本線 L1を走行する車両 2310から車両 IDや走行方向、走行速度な どの情報を受信し、それぞれの車両 2310が合流地点 Pに到達する時刻(以下、合流 時刻という)を算出し、保存している。また、合流側路側機 2330bは、合流車線 L2を 走行する車両 2320から車両 IDや走行方向、走行速度などの情報を受信し、車両 2 320の合流時刻を算出する。そして、本線側路側機 2330aに対して、衝突可能性が ある車両 2310があるかを照合要求する。  [0188] Here, an outline of driving support performed by the driving support system 2300 will be described. The main line side roadside machine 2330a receives information such as vehicle ID, travel direction, and travel speed from the vehicle 2310 traveling on the main line L1, and the time at which each vehicle 2310 arrives at the merge point P (hereinafter referred to as the merge time). Is calculated and saved. Further, the merging side roadside machine 2330b receives information such as the vehicle ID, the traveling direction, and the traveling speed from the vehicle 2320 traveling on the merging lane L2, and calculates the merging time of the vehicle 2320. Then, the main line side roadside machine 2330a is requested to collate whether there is a vehicle 2310 with a possibility of collision.
[0189] 本線側路側機 2330aは、車両 2320の合流時刻と保存している車両 2310の合流 時刻を照合し、合流時刻が所定時間内の車両 2310がある場合には、衝突可能性が あるとして合流側路側機 2330bに警告情報を送信する。合流側路側機 2330bは、 本線側路側機 2330aから警告情報を受信すると、合流車線 L2を走行する車両 232 0の通信機 2321に警告情報を送信する。  [0189] The main roadside unit 2330a compares the merging time of the vehicle 2320 with the stored merging time of the vehicle 2310, and if there is a vehicle 2310 whose merging time is within the predetermined time, there is a possibility of a collision. Warning information is transmitted to the merging side roadside machine 2330b. When the merging side roadside device 2330b receives the warning information from the main line side roadside device 2330a, the merging side roadside device 2330b transmits the warning information to the communication device 2321 of the vehicle 2230 traveling on the merging lane L2.
[0190] 通信機 2321では、警告情報の内容を表示したり、音声出力したりして、車両 2320 の運転者に車両 2310との衝突可能性を報知して、減速や車線変更など衝突回避の ための措置を講じるよう促す。以上のような処理によって、運転支援システム 2300は 、車両 2310, 2320の運転を支援する。  [0190] The communicator 2321 displays the contents of warning information or outputs a sound to inform the driver of the vehicle 2320 of the possibility of a collision with the vehicle 2310, and to avoid collision such as deceleration or lane change. Encourage them to take measures to The driving support system 2300 supports the driving of the vehicles 2310 and 2320 through the processing as described above.
[0191] なお、以下の実施例では、合流地点は高速道路の本線 L1と合流車線 L2の合流地 点 Pとしたが、この他、合流地点は、信号機が設けられていない交差点、または、信 号機が設けられて 、る交差点であってもよ 、。信号機が設けられて 、な 、交差点に おいては、交差する車線力 進入する他の車両の動きを知ることができず、事故が発 生する可能性が高い。また、信号機が設けられている交差点であっても、夜間点滅 式信号機の場合や、信号無視をして走行する他の車両がある場合などは、他の車両 との衝突可能性を判断する必要が生じるためである。 [0191] In the following examples, the junction point is the junction point P of the main road L1 and the junction lane L2, but the junction point is an intersection where no traffic lights are installed or It may be an intersection where a unit is installed. If there is a traffic light at the intersection, it is impossible to know the movement of other vehicles entering the intersecting lane force and an accident occurs. It is highly probable that Even at intersections where traffic lights are provided, it is necessary to determine the possibility of collision with other vehicles, such as at night flashing traffic lights or when there are other vehicles traveling with neglected signals. This is because.
[0192] また、以下の実施例では、 2つの道路が合流する合流地点を例に説明する力 2つ の道路が交差する四叉路ゃ三叉路、五叉路などであってもよい。これらの合流地点 でも、他の車両との衝突可能性を判断する必要が生じるためである。この場合、たと えば、合流地点に到達しょうとする車両 (以下の実施例では車両 2320)は、交差する 道路それぞれの近傍に設置された路側機 2330から警告情報などの提供を受ける。  [0192] In addition, in the following embodiments, a force for explaining the joining point of two roads as an example may be a four-fork road where two roads intersect, a three-way road, a five-way road, or the like. This is because it is necessary to judge the possibility of collision with other vehicles even at these junctions. In this case, for example, a vehicle (vehicle 2320 in the following example) trying to reach the junction receives information such as warning information from a roadside machine 2330 installed in the vicinity of each intersecting road.
[0193] さらに、実施例 1では、本線側路側機 2330aに、合流側路側機 2330bが照合要求 することとするが、合流側路側機 2330bに対して、本線側路側機 2330aが照合要求 をおこなうこととしてもよい。この場合、以下に説明する本線側路側機 2330aおよび 合流側路側機 2330bの処理をそれぞれ逆に読み替えればよい。  [0193] Furthermore, in the first embodiment, the merging side roadside device 2330b issues a verification request to the main roadside device 2330a, but the mainline side roadside device 2330a issues a verification request to the merging side roadside device 2330b. It is good as well. In this case, the processing of the main roadside machine 2330a and the merge side roadside machine 2330b described below may be read in reverse.
[0194] (路側機 2330のハードウ ア構成)  [0194] (Hardware configuration of roadside machine 2330)
ここで、路側機 2330のハードウェア構成については、実施の形態 1の実施例 1で説 明した構成と同様であるため、ここでは基本的な説明を省略する(図 5参照)。図 5に おける通信 IZF514は、無線を介して通信ネットワークに接続され、通信機 2311, 2 321と CPU501とのインターフェースとして機能する。通信機 2311, 2321のハード ウェア構成は、図 5に示したハードウェア構成のうち、少なくとも CPU501と、 ROM5 02と、 RAM503と、音声 I/F508と、スピーカ 510と、映像 I/F512と、ディスプレイ 513と、通信 I/F514と、を備免るちのとする。  Here, the hardware configuration of the roadside machine 2330 is the same as the configuration described in Example 1 of Embodiment 1, and thus the basic description is omitted here (see FIG. 5). Communication in FIG. 5 The IZF 514 is connected to a communication network via radio and functions as an interface between the communication devices 2311 and 2321 and the CPU 501. The hardware configurations of the communication devices 2311 and 2321 are at least the CPU 501, ROM 502, RAM 503, audio I / F 508, speaker 510, video I / F 512, display among the hardware configurations shown in FIG. It is assumed that 513 and communication I / F514 are removed.
[0195] また、実施の形態 2にかかる運転支援システム 2100の機能的構成のうち、受信部 2 111, 2121および送信部 2113, 2122は通信 IZF514によって、判断部 2112およ び算出部 2114は ROM502などに記録されたプログラムを CPU501が実行すること によって、それぞれその機能を実現する。  [0195] In addition, in the functional configuration of the driving support system 2100 according to the second embodiment, the reception units 2 111 and 2121 and the transmission units 2113 and 2122 are communicated by the communication IZF 514, and the determination unit 2112 and the calculation unit 2114 are ROM502. Each function is realized by the CPU 501 executing the programs recorded in the above.
[0196] (運転支援システム 2300の運転支援処理)  [0196] (Driving support processing of driving support system 2300)
つぎに、実施例 1にかかる運転支援システム 2300の運転支援処理の詳細につい て説明する。はじめに、本線 L1側に設置されている本線側路側機 2330aでおこなう 処理について説明する。図 17は、本線側路側機がおこなう運転支援処理の手順を 示すフローチャートである。 Next, details of the driving support processing of the driving support system 2300 according to the first embodiment will be described. First, the processing performed on the main roadside unit 2330a installed on the main line L1 side will be described. Figure 17 shows the procedure of the driving support process performed by the main roadside machine. It is a flowchart to show.
[0197] 図 17のフローチャートにおいて、本線側路側機 2330aは、自装置の通信エリア A に車両 2310が進入したか否かを判断する(ステップ S2501)。車両 2310が進入した 場合は(ステップ S2501 : Yes)、進入した車両 2310の通信機 2311から、車両 2310 の ID、走行方向、走行速度、位置情報を受信する (ステップ S2502)。  In the flowchart of FIG. 17, main line side roadside device 2330a determines whether or not vehicle 2310 has entered communication area A of its own device (step S2501). When the vehicle 2310 enters (step S2501: Yes), the ID, traveling direction, traveling speed, and position information of the vehicle 2310 are received from the communication device 2311 of the entering vehicle 2310 (step S2502).
[0198] 具体的には、車両 2310に対して、これらの情報の送信要求をおこない、返信され る情報を受信する。また、位置情報は、 GPS電波受信機が搭載されている場合など 、車両 2310に自車の現在位置を取得する機能が備わっている場合に送信を要求す る。一方、車両 2310が進入しない場合は(ステップ S2501 :No)、ステップ S2505に 移行する。  [0198] Specifically, the vehicle 2310 is requested to transmit such information, and the returned information is received. The location information is requested to be transmitted when the vehicle 2310 has a function for acquiring the current location of the vehicle, such as when a GPS radio wave receiver is installed. On the other hand, when the vehicle 2310 does not enter (step S2501: NO), the process proceeds to step S2505.
[0199] つぎに、本線側路側機 2330aは、ステップ S2502で受信した走行方向および走行 速度を元に車両 2310が合流地点 Pに到達する合流時刻を算出する (ステップ S250 3)。具体的には、車両 2310力 そのまま道なりに走行すると合流地点 Pに到達する 場合に、現在の走行速度を維持すると仮定して合流地点 Pに到達する時刻を算出す る。  Next, the main line side roadside machine 2330a calculates a merging time at which the vehicle 2310 reaches the merging point P based on the traveling direction and the traveling speed received in step S2502 (step S2503). Specifically, when the vehicle 2310 force travels as it is and reaches the merge point P, the current travel speed is assumed to be maintained, and the time to reach the merge point P is calculated.
[0200] なお、合流時刻の算出にあたって、車両 2310と合流地点 Pとの距離は、ステップ S 2502で受信した車両 2310の位置情報を用いて算出する。また、車両 2310と合流 地点 Pとの距離を、本線側路側機 2330aが記憶して ヽる本線側路側機 2330aと合流 地点 Pとの距離を近似して用いることとしてもよい。この場合、車両 2310が自車の現 在位置情報を取得する機能を有さなくても、合流時刻を算出することができる。また、 合流時刻は、合流地点 Pに到達するまでに起こりうる速度変化を考慮に入れ、時刻 ではなく所定の幅を有する時間帯として算出することとしてもよい。  [0200] It should be noted that in calculating the merging time, the distance between the vehicle 2310 and the merging point P is calculated using the position information of the vehicle 2310 received in step S2502. In addition, the distance between the main roadside unit 2330a and the confluence point P, which the main line side roadside device 2330a stores, may be used by approximating the distance between the vehicle 2310 and the confluence point P. In this case, the merging time can be calculated even if the vehicle 2310 does not have a function of acquiring the current position information of the own vehicle. Also, the merging time may be calculated as a time zone having a predetermined width instead of the time, taking into account the speed change that may occur before reaching the merging point P.
[0201] そして、本線側路側機 2330aは、受信した ID、走行方向、走行速度、位置情報や 、算出した合流時刻をデータベースとして保存する (ステップ S2504)。データベース に保存されたデータは、少なくとも合流時刻が経過するまでは本線側路側機 2330a で保存し、それ以降は逐次消去する。つぎに、本線側路側機 2330aは、合流側路側 機 2330bからデータベースの照合要求があつたか否かを判断する(ステップ S2505 [0201] Then, the main line side roadside device 2330a stores the received ID, traveling direction, traveling speed, position information, and calculated joining time as a database (step S2504). Data stored in the database is stored in the main roadside unit 2330a at least until the merging time elapses, and thereafter it is deleted sequentially. Next, the main line side roadside machine 2330a determines whether or not there is a database collation request from the merging side roadside machine 2330b (step S2505).
) o [0202] ここで、ステップ S2505において、データベースの照合要求とは、合流車線 L2を走 行する車両 2320の合流時刻と同時刻に、合流地点 Pに到達する車両 2310が存在 するかを合流側路側機 2330bが照合要求するものである。このとき合流側路側機 23 30bから送信される照合要求には、車両 2320の合流時刻が含まれている。 ) o [0202] Here, in step S2505, the database collation request means whether there is a vehicle 2310 that reaches the merge point P at the same time as the merge time of the vehicle 2320 traveling on the merge lane L2. The machine 2330b requests verification. At this time, the collation request transmitted from the merge side roadside machine 23 30b includes the merge time of the vehicle 2320.
[0203] 照合要求があった場合は(ステップ S2505: Yes)、ステップ S 2504で保存したデー タベースを照合して (ステップ S2506)、合流側路側機 2330bに照合結果を送信して (ステップ S2507)、本フローチャートによる処理を終了する。  [0203] If there is a verification request (step S2505: Yes), the database saved in step S 2504 is verified (step S2506), and the verification result is sent to the merging side roadside device 2330b (step S2507). Then, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.
[0204] ステップ S2506において、本線側路側機 2330aは、たとえば、車両 2320の合流時 刻を含む所定の時間帯 (たとえば、合流時刻の前後 15秒など)に合流時刻が含まれ る車両 2310があるかを照合し、ある場合には、その合流時刻、走行速度、位置情報 などを抽出する。そして、本線側路側機 2330aは、抽出した車両 2310の合流時刻、 走行速度、位置情報などを照合結果として送信する。  [0204] In step S2506, the main line side roadside machine 2330a has, for example, a vehicle 2310 whose merging time is included in a predetermined time zone including the merging time of the vehicle 2320 (for example, 15 seconds before and after the merging time). If there is, the time of merging, traveling speed, position information, etc. are extracted. Then, the main line side roadside machine 2330a transmits the extracted joining time, traveling speed, position information, and the like of the vehicle 2310 as a verification result.
[0205] 一方、車両 2320の合流時刻を含む所定の時間帯に合流時刻が含まれる車両 231 0がない場合は、該当する車両 2310がない旨の情報を送信する。また、このように該 当する車両 2310がない場合は、照合結果の送信を省略することをもって、該当する 車両 2310がな ヽ旨の情報の送信に代えてもよ!、。  [0205] On the other hand, if there is no vehicle 2130 including the joining time in a predetermined time zone including the joining time of the vehicle 2320, information indicating that there is no corresponding vehicle 2310 is transmitted. If there is no such vehicle 2310 as described above, the transmission of the verification result may be replaced with the transmission of information indicating that the corresponding vehicle 2310 is not!
[0206] 一方、ステップ S2505において、データベースの照合要求がない場合は(ステップ S2505 :No)、ステップ S2501に戻り、以降の処理を繰り返す。以上のような処理を 繰り返して、本線側路側機 2330aは、合流側路側機 2330bに本線 L1を走行する車 両 2310の情報を提供する。  On the other hand, if there is no database collation request in step S2505 (step S2505: No), the process returns to step S2501, and the subsequent processing is repeated. By repeating the above processing, the main roadside unit 2330a provides the merging side roadside unit 2330b with information on the vehicle 2310 traveling on the main line L1.
[0207] つぎに、合流側路側機 2330b側でおこなう処理について説明する。図 18は、合流 側路側機がおこなう運転支援処理の手順を示すフローチャートである。図 18のフロ 一チャートにおいて、合流側路側機 2330bは、自装置の通信エリア Bに車両 2320 が進入するまで待機する(ステップ S2601 :Noのループ)。車両 2320が進入した場 合は(ステップ S2601 : Yes)、進入した車両 2320の通信機 2321力も、車両 2320の ID、走行方向、走行速度、位置情報を受信する (ステップ S2602)。  [0207] Next, processing performed on the merging side roadside device 2330b side will be described. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing a procedure of driving support processing performed by the merging side roadside machine. In the flowchart of FIG. 18, the merging side roadside device 2330b waits until the vehicle 2320 enters the communication area B of its own device (step S2601: No loop). When the vehicle 2320 has entered (step S2601: Yes), the communicator 2321 force of the entering vehicle 2320 also receives the ID, traveling direction, traveling speed, and position information of the vehicle 2320 (step S2602).
[0208] 具体的には、本線側路側機 2330aと同様に、車両 2320に対してこれらの情報の 送信要求をおこない、返信される情報を受信する。また、位置情報は、 GPS電波受 信機が搭載されている場合など、車両 2320に自車の現在位置を取得する機能が備 わって 、る場合に送信を要求する。 [0208] Specifically, as with the main line side roadside machine 2330a, the vehicle 2320 is requested to transmit such information, and the returned information is received. Also, the location information Request transmission when the vehicle 2320 has a function to acquire the current position of the vehicle, such as when a communication device is installed.
[0209] つぎに、合流側路側機 2330bは、ステップ S2602で受信した走行方向および走行 速度を元に車両 2320が合流地点 Pに到達する合流時刻を算出する (ステップ S260 3)。具体的には、車両 2320が、そのまま道なりに走行すると合流地点 Pに到達する 場合に、現在の走行速度を維持すると仮定して合流地点 Pに到達する時刻を算出す る。 Next, merging side roadside device 2330b calculates a merging time at which vehicle 2320 reaches merging point P based on the traveling direction and traveling speed received in step S2602 (step S2603). Specifically, when the vehicle 2320 arrives at the junction P when traveling on the road as it is, the time when the vehicle 2320 arrives at the junction P is calculated assuming that the current traveling speed is maintained.
[0210] なお、合流時刻の算出にあたって、車両 2320と合流地点 Pとの距離は、ステップ S 2602で受信した車両 2320の位置情報を用いて算出する。また、車両 2320と合流 地点 Pとの距離を、合流側路側機 2330bが記憶して 、る合流側路側機 2330bと合 流地点 Pとの距離を近似して用いることとしてもよい。この場合、車両 2320が自車の 現在位置情報を取得する機能を有さなくても、合流時刻を算出することができる。ま た、合流時刻は、合流地点 Pに到達するまでに起こりうる速度変化を考慮に入れ、時 刻ではなく所定の幅を有する時間帯として算出することとしてもよい。  [0210] In calculating the merging time, the distance between the vehicle 2320 and the merging point P is calculated using the position information of the vehicle 2320 received in step S2602. Alternatively, the distance between the vehicle 2320 and the merge point P may be stored in the merge side roadside machine 2330b, and the distance between the merge side roadside machine 2330b and the merge point P may be approximated. In this case, the merging time can be calculated even if the vehicle 2320 does not have a function of acquiring the current position information of the own vehicle. Also, the merging time may be calculated as a time zone having a predetermined width instead of the time, taking into account the speed change that may occur before reaching the merging point P.
[0211] そして、合流側路側機 2330bは、本線側路側機 2330aに対して、ステップ S2603 で算出した合流時刻を含んだ照合要求を送信する (ステップ S2604)。照合要求とは 、車両 2320の合流時刻と同時刻に、合流地点 Pに到達する車両 2310が存在する かを合流側路側機 2330bが照合要求するものである。  [0211] Then, merging side roadside device 2330b transmits a collation request including the merging time calculated in step S2603 to main line side roadside device 2330a (step S2604). The verification request is a request for verification by the merging side roadside device 2330b whether there is a vehicle 2310 that reaches the merging point P at the same time as the merging time of the vehicle 2320.
[0212] 合流側路側機 2330bは、本線側路側機 2330aから照合要求に対する返信がある まで待機する (ステップ S2605: Noのループ)。本線側路側機 2330aから照合要求 に対する返信があると (ステップ S2605 : Yes)、返信された照合結果を元にして、車 両 2320と車両 2310とに衝突可能性があるか否かを判断する(ステップ S2606)。  [0212] Junction side roadside machine 2330b waits until a reply to the verification request is received from main line side roadside machine 2330a (step S2605: No loop). If there is a response to the verification request from main line side roadside machine 2330a (step S2605: Yes), it is determined whether there is a possibility of collision between vehicle 2320 and vehicle 2310 based on the returned verification result ( Step S2606).
[0213] 衝突可能性があるかの判断は、返信された照合結果を元にしておこなう。たとえば 、受信した照合結果に、車両 2310の合流時刻、走行速度、位置情報などが含まれ る場合は、衝突可能性ありと判断する。また、照合結果が該当する車両 2310がない 旨の情報である場合は、衝突可能性なしと判断する。  [0213] The determination of the possibility of collision is made based on the returned collation result. For example, if the received collation result includes the merging time, travel speed, position information, etc. of the vehicle 2310, it is determined that there is a possibility of collision. If the collation result is information indicating that there is no applicable vehicle 2310, it is determined that there is no possibility of collision.
[0214] また、たとえば、本線側路側機 2330aでは衝突可能性にっ 、ての判断をおこなわ ず、照合要求があった場合には記録しているすべての車両 2310の合流時刻を送信 することとしてもよい。この場合、合流側路側機 2330bは、本線側路側機 2330aから 送信された車両 2310の合流時刻と、車両 2320の合流時刻とを比較して、合流地点 での衝突可能性にっ 、て判断する。 [0214] Also, for example, the main roadside unit 2330a does not make any judgment due to the possibility of a collision, and when there is a verification request, it transmits the merging times of all the recorded vehicles 2310. It is good to do. In this case, the merging side roadside machine 2330b compares the merging time of the vehicle 2310 transmitted from the main line side roadside machine 2330a with the merging time of the vehicle 2320, and determines the possibility of a collision at the merging point. .
[0215] そして、衝突可能性がある場合は (ステップ S2606 : Yes)、車両 2320の通信機 23 21に警告情報を送信して (ステップ S2607)、本フローチャートによる処理を終了す る。ここで、車両 2320の通信機 2321への情報送信には、ステップ S2602で受信し た車両 2320の IDを通信用アドレスとして用いる。  [0215] If there is a possibility of collision (step S2606: Yes), warning information is transmitted to the communication device 2321 of the vehicle 2320 (step S2607), and the processing according to this flowchart is terminated. Here, for information transmission to the communication device 2321 of the vehicle 2320, the ID of the vehicle 2320 received in step S2602 is used as a communication address.
[0216] また、警告情報とは、衝突可能性がある車両 2310の存在を、車両 2320の運転者 に警告する情報である。具体的には、衝突可能性がある車両 2310の合流時刻や走 行速度、位置情報、衝突を回避するための具体的な措置などの情報である。  [0216] Further, the warning information is information that warns the driver of the vehicle 2320 of the presence of the vehicle 2310 that may collide. Specifically, it includes information such as the time of merging, traveling speed, position information, and specific measures to avoid a collision of the vehicle 2310 that may collide.
[0217] 通信機 2321は、送信された警告情報を画面表示や音声出力することによって、衝 突可能性のある車両 2310の存在を車両 2320の運転者に報知する。車両 2320の 運転者は、通信機 2321から報知される情報を元に、車両 2310との衝突を回避する 措置 (たとえば走行速度の低減、車線変更など)を講じる。  [0217] The communicator 2321 notifies the driver of the vehicle 2320 of the presence of the vehicle 2310 having a possibility of collision by displaying the transmitted warning information on a screen or outputting sound. The driver of the vehicle 2320 takes measures to avoid a collision with the vehicle 2310 (for example, reduction of travel speed, lane change, etc.) based on information notified from the communication device 2321.
[0218] 一方、衝突可能性がない場合は (ステップ S2606 : No)、警告情報の送信はおこな わず、本フローチャートによる処理を終了する。なお、このとき、衝突可能性がある車 両 2310はな 、旨の情報を送信することとしてもよ!、。  On the other hand, if there is no possibility of collision (step S2606: No), the warning information is not transmitted, and the processing according to this flowchart ends. At this time, the vehicle 2310 with the possibility of a collision may send information to that effect!
[0219] 以上説明したように、実施例 1にかかる運転支援システム 2300によれば、車両 232 0の運転者に対して、他の車線カゝら合流しょうとする車両 2310の存在や合流時刻、 走行速度などの情報を与え、合流地点 Pでの衝突を回避する措置を講じる際の判断 材料を提供する。これにより、合流地点 P付近での交通を円滑におこなわせることが できる。また、車両 2310および車両 2320の速度情報などを用いて、減速指示など の具体的な措置を指示すれば、さらに合流地点 P付近での交通の安全性を向上させ ることがでさる。  [0219] As described above, according to the driving support system 2300 according to the first embodiment, the presence of the vehicle 2310 to be merged from another lane vehicle and the merge time with respect to the driver of the vehicle 2320, Provide information such as travel speed, and provide judgment materials when taking measures to avoid a collision at junction P. As a result, traffic in the vicinity of the confluence point P can be performed smoothly. In addition, if the vehicle 2310 and the speed information of the vehicle 2320 are used to indicate specific measures such as a deceleration instruction, the safety of traffic near the junction P can be further improved.
[0220] また、他の車線を走行する車両 2310との衝突可能性があるかの判断を、路側機 2 330でおこなうことによって、車両 2320 (もしくは車両 2310)に搭載する通信機 232 1 (もしくは通信機 2311)の構成を簡易化することができる。  [0220] Further, by determining whether there is a possibility of collision with the vehicle 2310 traveling in another lane with the roadside device 2 330, the communication device 232 1 (or the vehicle 2310 (or the vehicle 2310)) is installed. The configuration of the communication device 2311) can be simplified.
[0221] なお、上述した本線側路側機 2330aの処理を、合流側路側機 2330bが車両 2320 に対しておこない、また、上述した合流側路側機 2330bの処理を、本線側路側機 23 30aが車両 2310に対しておこなうこととしてもよい。そして、それぞれの判断結果を 相互に送信することとすれば、それぞれ他の車線を走行する車両 2310, 2320の存 在を知ることができ、合流地点での交通をより一層安全におこなうことができる。 [0221] Note that the processing of the main line side roadside machine 2330a is the same as that of the merge side roadside machine 2330b. In addition, the main line side roadside machine 2330a may perform the processing of the above-mentioned merge side roadside machine 2330b on the vehicle 2310. If each judgment result is transmitted to each other, the existence of vehicles 2310 and 2320 traveling in other lanes can be known, and traffic at the junction can be made even safer. .
[0222] (実施例 2) [Example 2]
実施の形態 2の実施例 1にかかる運転支援システム 2300では、本線側路側機 233 Oaのみがデータベースを保持し、合流側路側機 2330bは、データベースの照合要 求をおこなっていた。実施の形態 2にかかる実施例 2では、本線側路側機 2330aお よび合流側路側機 2330bの間で、各車線 LI, L2を走行する車両 2310, 2320につ いての情報のデータベースを共有し、必要な場合には、各自が共有データベースを 参照して警告情報の送信をおこなう。  In the driving support system 2300 according to Example 1 of Embodiment 2, only the main roadside device 233 Oa holds the database, and the merge side roadside device 2330b makes a database verification request. In Example 2 according to the second embodiment, a database of information on the vehicles 2310 and 2320 traveling in the respective lanes LI and L2 is shared between the main roadside unit 2330a and the merging side roadside unit 2330b. If necessary, each person sends warning information by referring to the shared database.
[0223] 図 19は、実施例 2にかかる運転支援システムの運転支援処理の手順を示すフロー チャートである。以下、表記の都合上、本線側路側機 2330aの処理として説明する 力 本フローチャートの処理は、本線側路側機 2330aおよび合流側路側機 2330b で共通しておこなう。 FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the driving support process of the driving support system according to the second embodiment. In the following, for convenience of description, the power described as the processing of the main roadside unit 2330a is the same as that of the main roadside unit 2330a and the merging side roadside unit 2330b.
[0224] 図 19のフローチャートにおいて、本線側路側機 2330aは、自装置の通信エリア A に車両 2310が進入するまで待機する(ステップ S2701 :Noのループ)。車両 2310 が進入した場合は(ステップ S2701 : Yes)、進入した車両 2310の通信機 2311から 、車両 2310の ID、走行方向、走行速度、位置情報を受信する (ステップ S2702)。  In the flowchart of FIG. 19, main line side roadside machine 2330a waits until vehicle 2310 enters communication area A of the own apparatus (step S2701: No loop). If the vehicle 2310 has entered (step S2701: Yes), the ID, traveling direction, traveling speed, and position information of the vehicle 2310 are received from the communication device 2311 of the entering vehicle 2310 (step S2702).
[0225] 具体的には、実施例 1と同様に、車両 2310に対して、これらの情報の送信要求を おこない、返信される情報を受信する。また、位置情報は、 GPS電波受信機が搭載 されている場合など、車両 2310に自車の現在位置を取得する機能が備わっている 場合に送信を要求する。  [0225] Specifically, in the same manner as in the first embodiment, the vehicle 2310 is requested to transmit these pieces of information, and the returned information is received. The location information is requested to be transmitted when the vehicle 2310 has a function to acquire the current location of the vehicle, such as when a GPS radio receiver is installed.
[0226] つぎに、本線側路側機 2330aは、ステップ S2702で受信した走行方向および走行 速度を元に車両 2310が合流地点 Pに到達する合流時刻を算出する (ステップ S270 3)。具体的には、車両 2310力 そのまま道なりに走行すると合流地点 Pに到達する 場合に、現在の走行速度を維持すると仮定して合流地点 Pに到達する時刻を算出す る。 [0227] なお、合流時刻の算出にあたって、車両 2310と合流地点 Pとの距離は、ステップ S 2702で受信した車両 2310の位置情報を用いて算出する。また、車両 2310と合流 地点 Pとの距離を、本線側路側機 2330aが記憶して ヽる本線側路側機 2330aと合流 地点 Pとの距離を近似して用いることとしてもよい。この場合、車両 2310が自車の現 在位置情報を取得する機能を有さなくても、合流時刻を算出することができる。また、 合流時刻は、合流地点 Pに到達するまでに起こりうる速度変化を考慮に入れ、時刻 ではなく所定の幅を有する時間帯として算出することとしてもよい。 [0226] Next, the main roadside unit 2330a calculates the merging time when the vehicle 2310 reaches the merging point P based on the traveling direction and the traveling speed received in step S2702 (step S2703). Specifically, when the vehicle 2310 force travels as it is and reaches the merge point P, the current travel speed is assumed to be maintained, and the time to reach the merge point P is calculated. [0227] In calculating the merging time, the distance between the vehicle 2310 and the merging point P is calculated using the position information of the vehicle 2310 received in step S2702. In addition, the distance between the main roadside unit 2330a and the confluence point P, which the main line side roadside device 2330a stores, may be used by approximating the distance between the vehicle 2310 and the confluence point P. In this case, the merging time can be calculated even if the vehicle 2310 does not have a function of acquiring the current position information of the own vehicle. Also, the merging time may be calculated as a time zone having a predetermined width instead of the time, taking into account the speed change that may occur before reaching the merging point P.
[0228] そして、本線側路側機 2330aは、受信した ID、走行方向、走行速度、位置情報や 算出した合流時刻を共有データベースに保存する (ステップ S2704)。本線側路側 機 2330aと合流側路側機 2330bは、それぞれの記憶領域に共有データベースを保 存している。  [0228] Then, the main line side roadside machine 2330a stores the received ID, traveling direction, traveling speed, position information, and calculated joining time in the shared database (step S2704). The main line side roadside machine 2330a and the merge side roadside machine 2330b store a shared database in their respective storage areas.
[0229] 本線側路側機 2330aと合流側路側機 2330bは常時接続しており、それぞれがおこ なった共有データベースの更新は、両路側機 2330がそれぞれ保存するデータべ一 スにリアルタイムに反映される。データベースに保存されたデータは、少なくとも合流 時刻が経過するまでは本線側路側機 2330aで保存し、それ以降は逐次消去する。  [0229] The main roadside unit 2330a and the merging side roadside unit 2330b are always connected, and the update of the shared database performed by each is reflected in real time in the database stored in both roadside units 2330 . The data stored in the database is stored at the main roadside unit 2330a at least until the merging time elapses, and thereafter it is deleted sequentially.
[0230] つぎに、本線側路側機 2330aは、共有データベースを参照して、車両 2310と衝突 可能性がある車両 2320がある力否かを判断する(ステップ S2705)。共有データべ ースは合流側路側機 2330bがおこなった更新も、リアルタイムに反映されている。こ のため、共有データベースを参照すれば、車両 2310と衝突可能性がある車両 2320 があるかを知ることができる。  [0230] Next, the main line side roadside machine 2330a refers to the shared database to determine whether or not there is a vehicle 2320 that may collide with the vehicle 2310 (step S2705). In the shared database, updates made by the confluence roadside unit 2330b are also reflected in real time. Therefore, it is possible to know whether there is a vehicle 2320 that may collide with the vehicle 2310 by referring to the shared database.
[0231] 衝突可能性があるかの判断は、たとえば、車両 2310の合流時刻を含む所定の時 間帯 (たとえば、合流時刻の前後 15秒など)に合流時刻が含まれる車両 2320は、衝 突可能性ありと判断する。衝突可能性がある車両 2320がある場合は (ステップ S270 5 : Yes)、車両 2320に対して、衝突可能性がある車両 2310の合流時刻、走行速度 、位置情報などを含んだ警告情報を送信する (ステップ S2706)。なお、このとき、車 両 2310の通信機 2311への情報送信には、ステップ S2702で受信した車両 2310 の IDを通信用アドレスとして用いる。  [0231] For example, a vehicle 2320 that includes a merging time in a predetermined time zone including the merging time of the vehicle 2310 (for example, 15 seconds before and after the merging time) determines whether there is a collision possibility. Judge that there is a possibility. If there is a vehicle 2320 with a possibility of collision (step S270 5: Yes), warning information including the merging time, traveling speed, position information, etc. of the vehicle 2310 with a possibility of collision is transmitted to the vehicle 2320. (Step S2706). At this time, for the information transmission of the vehicle 2310 to the communication device 2311, the ID of the vehicle 2310 received in step S2702 is used as the communication address.
[0232] 一方、衝突可能性がない場合は (ステップ S2705 : No)、警告情報の送信はおこな わず、本フローチャートによる処理を終了する。なお、このとき、衝突可能性がある車 両 2320はな 、旨の情報を送信することとしてもよ!、。 [0232] On the other hand, if there is no possibility of collision (step S2705: No), the warning information is not transmitted. The process according to this flowchart is terminated. At this time, the vehicle 2320 with the possibility of collision may send information to that effect!
[0233] 以上説明したように、実施例 2にかかる運転支援システム 2300は、本線側路側機 2 330aと合流側路側機 2330bとを常時接続し、データベースを共有する。これにより、 本線側路側機 2330aおよび合流側路側機 2330bは、自装置側で保存するデータ ベースを参照することによって、それぞれの車線 LI, L2を走行する車両 2310, 232 0に警告情報を送信することができる。  [0233] As described above, the driving support system 2300 according to the second embodiment always connects the main roadside unit 2330a and the merging side roadside unit 2330b, and shares the database. As a result, the main roadside machine 2330a and the merging side roadside machine 2330b send warning information to the vehicles 2310, 232 0 traveling in the respective lanes LI, L2 by referring to the database stored on the own device side. be able to.
[0234] 以上説明したように、運転支援システム、運転支援方法、運転支援プログラムおよ び記録媒体によれば、合流地点 Pに合流する 2つのルート(車線) LI, L2のうち、一 方のルートである本線 L1から合流地点 Pに向かって移動している車両 2310の有無 につ 、ての情報を、他方のルートである合流車線 L2を移動して 、る車両 2320に送 信することができる。これにより、車両 2320は、合流地点 Pにおいて車両 2310と衝突 する可能性があるかどうかを知ることができる。  [0234] As explained above, according to the driving support system, the driving support method, the driving support program, and the recording medium, one of the two routes (lanes) LI, L2 that joins the junction P Information about the presence or absence of the vehicle 2310 moving from the main line L1 to the merge point P can be sent to the vehicle 2320 traveling on the other route, the merge lane L2. it can. As a result, the vehicle 2320 can know whether or not there is a possibility of collision with the vehicle 2310 at the junction P.
[0235] また、判断結果とともに車両 2310の移動速度や合流時刻の情報を、車両 2320に 送信する。これにより、合流地点 Pでの衝突を回避するための策を講じる際に判断材 料となる情報を、車両 2320の運転者に与えることができる。  [0235] Also, information on the moving speed and joining time of the vehicle 2310 is transmitted to the vehicle 2320 together with the determination result. As a result, the driver of the vehicle 2320 can be given information as a judgment material when taking measures to avoid a collision at the junction P.
[0236] なお、各実施の形態で説明した運転支援方法は、あらかじめ用意されたプログラム をパーソナル.コンピュータやワークステーション等のコンピュータで実行することによ り実現することができる。このプログラムは、ハードディスク、フレキシブルディスク、 C D— ROM、 MO、 DVD等のコンピュータで読み取り可能な記録媒体に記録され、コ ンピュータによって記録媒体力 読み出されることによって実行される。またこのプロ グラムは、インターネット等のネットワークを介して配布することが可能な伝送媒体で あってもよい。  [0236] The driving support method described in each embodiment can be realized by executing a program prepared in advance on a computer such as a personal computer or a workstation. This program is recorded on a computer-readable recording medium such as a hard disk, a flexible disk, a CD-ROM, an MO, or a DVD, and is executed by being read by the computer. The program may be a transmission medium that can be distributed via a network such as the Internet.

Claims

請求の範囲 The scope of the claims
[1] 合流地点に合流する 2つのルートのうち一方のルートの近傍に設置されている第 1 の通信装置と、他方のルートの近傍に設置されている第 2の通信装置と、力 なる運 転支援システムであって、  [1] Of the two routes that join the junction, the first communication device installed near one route and the second communication device installed near the other route A rotation support system,
前記第 1の通信装置は、  The first communication device is:
前記一方のルートを移動している第 1の移動体の進行方向に関する情報を前記第 1の移動体から受信する第 1の受信手段と、  First receiving means for receiving, from the first moving body, information relating to the traveling direction of the first moving body moving along the one route;
前記第 1の受信手段によって受信された進行方向に関する情報に基づいて、前記 第 1の移動体が前記合流地点に向かって移動しているか否かを判断する判断手段と 前記判断手段によって判断された判断結果を、前記第 2の通信装置に送信する第 1の送信手段と、を備え、  Based on the information on the traveling direction received by the first receiving means, the judging means for judging whether or not the first moving body is moving toward the joining point, and the judgment means First transmission means for transmitting the determination result to the second communication device,
前記第 2の通信装置は、  The second communication device is:
前記第 1の送信手段によって送信された判断結果を受信する第 2の受信手段と、 前記第 2の受信手段によって受信された判断結果を、前記他方のルートを移動して A second receiving means for receiving the determination result transmitted by the first transmitting means; and a determination result received by the second receiving means by moving the other route.
V、る第 2の移動体に送信する第 2の送信手段と、 V, second transmission means for transmitting to the second mobile body,
を備えることを特徴とする運転支援システム。  A driving support system comprising:
[2] 前記第 1の受信手段は、前記第 1の移動体の進行方向に関する情報とともに、前記 第 1の移動体の移動速度に関する情報を連続的に受信することを特徴とする請求項[2] The first receiving means may continuously receive information on a moving speed of the first moving body together with information on a traveling direction of the first moving body.
1に記載の運転支援システム。 The driving support system according to 1.
[3] 前記判断手段によって前記第 1の移動体が前記合流地点に向かっていると判断さ れた場合、前記第 1の受信手段によって連続的に受信された移動速度に関する情報 に基づいて、前記移動速度の時間的変化を検出する検出手段をさらに備え、 前記第 1の送信手段は、前記判断結果とともに前記検出手段によって検出された 検出結果を、前記第 2の通信装置に送信し、 [3] When it is determined by the determination means that the first moving body is moving toward the joining point, the information on the moving speed continuously received by the first reception means is A detection means for detecting a temporal change in moving speed, wherein the first transmission means transmits the detection result detected by the detection means together with the determination result to the second communication device;
前記第 2の受信手段は、前記判断結果と検出結果を受信するとともに、前記第 2の 送信手段は、前記受信された判断結果と検出結果を、前記第 2の移動体に送信する ことを特徴とする請求項 2に記載の運転支援システム。 The second reception unit receives the determination result and the detection result, and the second transmission unit transmits the received determination result and the detection result to the second moving body. The driving support system according to claim 2.
[4] 前記第 1の受信手段は、 [4] The first receiving means includes:
前記第 1の移動体の移動速度に関する情報を受信し、  Receiving information on the moving speed of the first moving body;
前記第 1の送信手段は、  The first transmission means includes
前記判断手段によって前記合流地点に移動していると判断された場合、前記判断 結果とともに、前記第 1の受信手段によって受信された移動速度に関する情報を前 記第 2の通信装置に送信し、  When it is determined by the determining means that the vehicle is moving to the junction, the information on the moving speed received by the first receiving means is transmitted to the second communication device together with the determination result;
前記第 2の受信手段は、  The second receiving means includes
前記第 1の送信手段によって送信された移動速度に関する情報を受信し、 前記第 2の送信手段は、  Receiving the information on the moving speed transmitted by the first transmission means, the second transmission means,
前記第 2の受信手段によって受信された移動速度に関する情報を、前記他方のル ートを移動している第 2の移動体に送信することを特徴とする請求項 1〜3のいずれ か一つに記載の運転支援システム。  4. The information on the moving speed received by the second receiving means is transmitted to the second moving body that is moving on the other route. The driving support system described in 1.
[5] 前記第 1の通信装置は、 [5] The first communication device includes:
前記第 1の受信手段によって受信された移動速度に関する情報に基づいて、前記 第 1の移動体が前記合流地点に到達する時間を算出する算出手段を備え、 前記第 1の送信手段は、  Based on the information on the moving speed received by the first receiving means, the calculating means includes a calculating means for calculating the time for the first moving body to reach the joining point, and the first transmitting means includes:
前記判断手段によって前記合流地点に移動していると判断された場合、前記判断 結果とともに、前記算出手段によって算出された算出結果を前記第 2の通信装置に 送信し、  When it is determined by the determination means that the vehicle has moved to the joining point, the calculation result calculated by the calculation means is transmitted to the second communication device together with the determination result;
前記第 2の受信手段は、  The second receiving means includes
前記第 1の送信手段によって送信された算出結果を受信し、  Receiving the calculation result transmitted by the first transmission means;
前記第 2の送信手段は、  The second transmission means includes
前記第 2の受信手段によって受信された算出結果を、前記他方のルートを移動して いる第 2の移動体に送信することを特徴とする請求項 4に記載の運転支援システム。  5. The driving support system according to claim 4, wherein the calculation result received by the second receiving means is transmitted to a second moving body moving on the other route.
[6] 前記第 1の通信装置は前記一方のルートの近傍に設置されており、 [6] The first communication device is installed in the vicinity of the one route,
前記算出手段は、  The calculating means includes
前記移動速度に関する情報と、前記第 1の通信装置と前記合流地点間の距離と、 に基づいて、前記第 1の移動体が前記合流地点に到達する時間を算出することを特 徴とする請求項 5に記載の運転支援システム。 Based on the information on the moving speed and the distance between the first communication device and the joining point, the time for the first moving body to reach the joining point is calculated. The driving support system according to claim 5, wherein
[7] 前記検出手段は、 [7] The detection means includes
前記第 1の移動体の現在位置と前記合流地点間の距離とに基づいて、前記合流 地点に到達する時間の前記移動速度ごとの変化を検出することを特徴とする請求項 3に記載の運転支援システム。  4. The operation according to claim 3, wherein a change for each moving speed of time to reach the joining point is detected based on a current position of the first moving body and a distance between the joining points. Support system.
[8] 前記第 2の受信手段は、 [8] The second receiving means includes
前記第 2の送信手段からの前記判断結果および前記検出結果の送信前後におけ る前記第 2の移動体の移動速度に関する情報を受信し、  Receiving information on the moving speed of the second moving body before and after transmission of the determination result and the detection result from the second transmitting means;
前記第 2の通信装置は、  The second communication device is:
前記第 2の受信手段によって前記第 2の移動体の移動速度に関する情報が受信さ れた場合、前記送信前後における前記移動速度に基づいて、前記第 1および第 2の 移動体の衝突可能性を判定する判定手段を備え、  When information on the moving speed of the second moving body is received by the second receiving means, the possibility of collision of the first and second moving bodies is determined based on the moving speed before and after the transmission. A determination means for determining,
前記第 2の送信手段は、  The second transmission means includes
前記判定手段によって判定された判定結果を、前記第 1の通信装置に送信し、 前記第 1の受信手段は、  The determination result determined by the determination means is transmitted to the first communication device, and the first reception means is
前記第 2の送信手段によって送信された判定結果を受信し、  Receiving the determination result transmitted by the second transmission means;
前記第 1の送信手段は、  The first transmission means includes
前記第 1の受信手段によって受信された判定結果を、前記第 1の移動体に送信す ることを特徴とする請求項 3に記載の運転支援システム。  4. The driving support system according to claim 3, wherein the determination result received by the first receiving means is transmitted to the first moving body.
[9] 前記第 2の受信手段は、 [9] The second receiving means includes
前記第 2の送信手段からの前記判断結果および前記検出結果の送信前後におけ る前記第 2の移動体の移動速度に関する情報を受信し、  Receiving information on the moving speed of the second moving body before and after transmission of the determination result and the detection result from the second transmitting means;
前記第 2の送信手段は、  The second transmission means includes
前記第 2の受信手段によって受信された前記第 2の移動体の移動速度に関する情 報を前記第 1の通信装置に送信し、  Transmitting information on the moving speed of the second moving body received by the second receiving means to the first communication device;
前記第 1の受信手段は、  The first receiving means includes
前記第 2の送信手段によって送信された前記第 2の移動体の移動速度に関する情 報を受信し、 前記第 1の通信装置は、 Receiving information on the moving speed of the second moving body transmitted by the second transmitting means; The first communication device is:
前記第 1の受信手段によって前記第 2の移動体の移動速度に関する情報が受信さ れた場合、前記送信前後における前記移動速度に基づいて、前記第 1および第 2の 移動体の衝突可能性を判定する判定手段を備え、  When information on the moving speed of the second moving body is received by the first receiving means, the possibility of collision of the first and second moving bodies is determined based on the moving speed before and after the transmission. A determination means for determining,
前記第 1の送信手段は、  The first transmission means includes
前記判定手段によって判定された判定結果を、前記第 1の移動体に送信することを 特徴とする請求項 3に記載の運転支援システム。  4. The driving support system according to claim 3, wherein the determination result determined by the determination means is transmitted to the first moving body.
[10] 前記判定手段は、 [10] The determination means includes:
前記第 2の通信装置と前記合流地点間の距離とに基づいて、前記第 1および第 2 の移動体の衝突可能性を判定することを特徴とする請求項 8または 9に記載の運転 支援システム。  10. The driving support system according to claim 8, wherein the possibility of collision of the first and second moving bodies is determined based on a distance between the second communication device and the junction point. .
[11] 合流地点に合流する 2つのルートのうち一方のルートの近傍に設置されている第 1 の通信装置と、他方のルートの近傍に設置されている第 2の通信装置と、通信可能な 運転支援装置であって、  [11] Communication is possible with the first communication device installed in the vicinity of one of the two routes joining the junction and the second communication device installed in the vicinity of the other route. A driving support device,
前記第 1の通信装置から、前記一方のルートを移動している第 1の移動体の進行方 向に関する情報を受信するとともに、前記第 1の移動体の移動速度に関する情報を 連続的に受信する受信手段と、  From the first communication device, information on the traveling direction of the first moving body moving on the one route is received, and information on the moving speed of the first moving body is continuously received. Receiving means;
前記受信手段によって受信された進行方向に関する情報に基づいて、前記第 1の 移動体が前記合流地点に向かって移動している力否かを判断する判断手段と、 前記判断手段によって前記合流地点に向かって移動していると判断された場合、 前記第 1の受信手段によって連続的に受信された移動速度に関する情報に基づい て、前記移動速度の時間的変化を検出する検出手段と、  Based on the information on the traveling direction received by the receiving means, a judging means for judging whether or not the first moving body is moving toward the joining point; and Detecting means for detecting a temporal change in the moving speed based on information on the moving speed continuously received by the first receiving means,
前記判断手段によって判断された判断結果と前記検出手段によって検出された検 出結果とを、前記第 2の通信装置に送信する送信手段と、  Transmitting means for transmitting the determination result determined by the determination means and the detection result detected by the detection means to the second communication device;
を備えることを特徴とする運転支援装置。  A driving support apparatus comprising:
[12] 合流地点に合流する 2つのルートのうち一方のルートの近傍に設置されている第 1 の通信装置と、他方のルートの近傍に設置されている第 2の通信装置とを用いた運 転支援方法であって、 前記第 1の通信装置により、前記一方のルートを移動している第 1の移動体の進行 方向に関する情報を前記第 1の移動体力 受信する第 1の受信工程と、 [12] Operation using a first communication device installed in the vicinity of one of the two routes joining the junction and a second communication device installed in the vicinity of the other route. A support method, A first receiving step of receiving, by the first communication device, information on a traveling direction of the first moving body moving along the one route, the first moving body force;
前記第 1の受信工程によって受信された進行方向に関する情報に基づいて、前記 第 1の移動体が前記合流地点に向力つて移動しているか否かを判断する判断工程と 前記判断工程によって判断された判断結果を、前記第 2の通信装置に送信する第 1の送信工程と、  A determination step of determining whether or not the first moving body is moving to the merging point on the basis of the information on the traveling direction received by the first reception step; A first transmission step of transmitting the determined result to the second communication device;
前記第 2の通信装置により、前記第 1の送信工程によって送信された判断結果を受 信する第 2の受信工程と、  A second receiving step of receiving a determination result transmitted by the first transmitting step by the second communication device; and
前記第 2の受信工程によって受信された判断結果を、前記他方のルートを移動して V、る第 2の移動体に送信する第 2の送信工程と、  A second transmission step of transmitting the determination result received in the second reception step to the second mobile body that travels the other route V;
を含むことを特徴とする運転支援方法。  A driving support method comprising:
[13] 前記第 1の受信工程では、前記第 1の移動体の進行方向に関する情報を受信する とともに、前記第 1の移動体の移動速度に関する情報を連続的に受信することを特徴 とする請求項 12に記載の運転支援方法。 [13] In the first receiving step, the information on the traveling direction of the first moving body is received, and the information on the moving speed of the first moving body is continuously received. The driving support method according to Item 12.
[14] 前記判断工程によって前記第 1の移動体が前記合流地点に向かって移動している と判断された場合、前記第 1の受信工程によって連続的に受信された移動速度に関 する情報に基づいて、前記移動速度の時間的変化を検出する検出工程をさらに含 み、 [14] When it is determined by the determination step that the first moving body is moving toward the joining point, information on the moving speed continuously received by the first reception step Further including a detection step of detecting a temporal change in the moving speed,
前記第 1の送信工程では、判断結果とともに前記検出工程によって検出された検 出結果を、前記第 2の通信装置に送信し、  In the first transmission step, the detection result detected by the detection step together with the determination result is transmitted to the second communication device,
前記第 2の受信工程では、前記判断結果および前記検出結果を受信するとともに 、前記第 2の送信工程では、前記受信された判断結果および検出結果を、前記第 2 の移動体に送信することを特徴とする請求項 13に記載の運転支援方法。  In the second reception step, the determination result and the detection result are received, and in the second transmission step, the received determination result and detection result are transmitted to the second moving body. The driving support method according to claim 13, wherein
[15] 合流地点に合流する 2つのルートのうち一方のルートの近傍に設置されている第 1 の通信装置と、他方のルートの近傍に設置されている第 2の通信装置と、を用いる運 転支援方法であって、 [15] An operation using a first communication device installed in the vicinity of one of the two routes joining the junction and a second communication device installed in the vicinity of the other route. A support method,
前記第 1の通信装置から、前記一方のルートを移動している第 1の移動体の進行方 向に関する情報を受信するとともに、前記第 1の移動体の移動速度に関する情報を 連続的に受信する受信工程と、 How the first moving body traveling on the one route travels from the first communication device A reception step of continuously receiving information on the moving speed of the first moving body,
前記受信工程によって受信された進行方向に関する情報に基づいて、前記第 1の 移動体が前記合流地点に向かって移動している力否かを判断する判断工程と、 前記判断工程によって前記合流地点に向かって移動していると判断された場合、 前記第 1の受信工程によって連続的に受信された移動速度に関する情報に基づい て、前記移動速度の時間的変化を検出する検出工程と、  A determination step of determining whether or not the first moving body is moving toward the merging point based on the information on the traveling direction received by the receiving step; and A detecting step for detecting a temporal change in the moving speed based on information on the moving speed continuously received by the first receiving step,
前記判断工程によって判断された判断結果と前記検出工程によって検出された検 出結果とを、前記第 2の通信装置に送信する送信工程と、  A transmission step of transmitting the determination result determined by the determination step and the detection result detected by the detection step to the second communication device;
を含むことを特徴とする運転支援方法。  A driving support method comprising:
[16] 請求項 12〜 15の 、ずれか一つに記載の運転支援方法をコンピュータに実行させ ることを特徴とする運転支援プログラム。 [16] A driving support program that causes a computer to execute the driving support method according to any one of claims 12 to 15.
[17] 請求項 16に記載の運転支援プログラムを記録したコンピュータに読み取り可能な 記録媒体。 [17] A computer-readable recording medium on which the driving support program according to claim 16 is recorded.
PCT/JP2006/317348 2005-09-01 2006-09-01 Driving support system, driving support apparatus, driving support method, driving support program and recording medium WO2007026881A1 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2007533361A JP4789948B2 (en) 2005-09-01 2006-09-01 Driving support system, driving support device, driving support method, driving support program, and recording medium

Applications Claiming Priority (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2005253800 2005-09-01
JP2005-253800 2005-09-01
JP2005-269010 2005-09-15
JP2005269010 2005-09-15

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2007026881A1 true WO2007026881A1 (en) 2007-03-08

Family

ID=37808965

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2006/317348 WO2007026881A1 (en) 2005-09-01 2006-09-01 Driving support system, driving support apparatus, driving support method, driving support program and recording medium

Country Status (2)

Country Link
JP (1) JP4789948B2 (en)
WO (1) WO2007026881A1 (en)

Cited By (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2009071652A (en) * 2007-09-14 2009-04-02 Nec Corp Road-to-vehicle communication system, road-to-vehicle communication method road-to-vehicle communication program, and program recording medium
JPWO2016013040A1 (en) * 2014-07-22 2017-04-27 三菱電機株式会社 Driving support system, driving support method and program
JP2017097457A (en) * 2015-11-19 2017-06-01 三菱電機株式会社 Vehicle travel support system and vehicle travel support method
JP2017207813A (en) * 2016-05-16 2017-11-24 株式会社デンソー Travel support device
CN107408343A (en) * 2015-03-31 2017-11-28 爱信艾达株式会社 Automatic Pilot accessory system, automatic Pilot householder method and computer program
CN111429739A (en) * 2018-12-20 2020-07-17 阿里巴巴集团控股有限公司 Driving assisting method and system

Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2001143197A (en) * 1999-11-10 2001-05-25 Nippon Telegr & Teleph Corp <Ntt> Roadside device, device and method for preventing collision of vehicles as they passing by and recording medium
JP2001166050A (en) * 1999-12-14 2001-06-22 Oki Electric Ind Co Ltd Lane marker system at merging point
JP2002056495A (en) * 2000-08-07 2002-02-22 Denso Corp Emergency vehicle approach announcing system, on- vehicle communication equipment and roadside communication equipment
JP2004191093A (en) * 2002-12-09 2004-07-08 Yamaha Corp Traffic hazardous location notification system

Family Cites Families (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2003058995A (en) * 2001-08-15 2003-02-28 Fujitsu Ltd Program and device for supporting traffic

Patent Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2001143197A (en) * 1999-11-10 2001-05-25 Nippon Telegr & Teleph Corp <Ntt> Roadside device, device and method for preventing collision of vehicles as they passing by and recording medium
JP2001166050A (en) * 1999-12-14 2001-06-22 Oki Electric Ind Co Ltd Lane marker system at merging point
JP2002056495A (en) * 2000-08-07 2002-02-22 Denso Corp Emergency vehicle approach announcing system, on- vehicle communication equipment and roadside communication equipment
JP2004191093A (en) * 2002-12-09 2004-07-08 Yamaha Corp Traffic hazardous location notification system

Cited By (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2009071652A (en) * 2007-09-14 2009-04-02 Nec Corp Road-to-vehicle communication system, road-to-vehicle communication method road-to-vehicle communication program, and program recording medium
JPWO2016013040A1 (en) * 2014-07-22 2017-04-27 三菱電機株式会社 Driving support system, driving support method and program
CN107408343A (en) * 2015-03-31 2017-11-28 爱信艾达株式会社 Automatic Pilot accessory system, automatic Pilot householder method and computer program
JP2017097457A (en) * 2015-11-19 2017-06-01 三菱電機株式会社 Vehicle travel support system and vehicle travel support method
JP2017207813A (en) * 2016-05-16 2017-11-24 株式会社デンソー Travel support device
CN111429739A (en) * 2018-12-20 2020-07-17 阿里巴巴集团控股有限公司 Driving assisting method and system

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
JPWO2007026881A1 (en) 2009-03-12
JP4789948B2 (en) 2011-10-12

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
JP6537631B2 (en) Prediction device, prediction system, prediction method and prediction program
WO2019069868A1 (en) Determination device, determination method, and program for determination
WO2019091288A1 (en) Traffic flow control method in internet-of-vehicles, and device for same
JP4789945B2 (en) Driving support device, driving support method, driving support program, and recording medium
JP6565480B2 (en) Driving support device, computer program, and driving support system
KR20160055571A (en) Self driving vehicle, self driving management apparatus and method for controlling the same
JP4789948B2 (en) Driving support system, driving support device, driving support method, driving support program, and recording medium
JPH11110700A (en) Intersection information providing system and on-vehicle information transmitter applied to the system
KR101439019B1 (en) Car control apparatus and its car control apparatus and autonomic driving method
JP2019036339A (en) Driving support device
KR20150084112A (en) System and method for controlling vihicle at intersection
JP2007145095A (en) Traveling controller, traveling control method, traveling control program and recording medium
WO2023179494A1 (en) Danger early warning method and apparatus, and vehicle
US20200377012A1 (en) Multimodal vehicle-to-pedestrian notification system
WO2018032632A1 (en) Early warning method and device for vehicle
KR20220030232A (en) Apparatus and method For Warning a signal violation vehicle at intersection
JP2016189074A (en) Notification device, notification method, and notification program
JP2009103524A (en) Navigation device, navigation method, navigation program, and computer-readable recording medium
JP4812767B2 (en) Driving support device, driving support method, driving support program, and recording medium
CN115265537A (en) Navigation system with traffic state detection mechanism and method of operation thereof
Leong et al. 5G Intelligent Transportation Systems for Smart Cities
JP2007256195A (en) Annunciator, announcing method, announcement program, and recording medium
WO2007105504A1 (en) Route guidance device, route guidance method, route guidance program, and recording medium
JP2019067280A (en) Control device, control method, and control program
US20220250657A1 (en) Autonomous vehicle interaction system

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application
DPE1 Request for preliminary examination filed after expiration of 19th month from priority date (pct application filed from 20040101)
WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2007533361

Country of ref document: JP

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 06797290

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1